اِلَی
Appears 133 times in Quran
Occurrences in Quran
Found 50 verses containing "اِلَی".
ہُوَ الَّذِیۡ خَلَقَ لَکُمۡ مَّا فِی الۡاَرۡضِ جَمِیۡعًا ثُمَّ اسۡتَوٰۤی اِلَی السَّمَآءِ فَسَوّٰٮہُنَّ سَبۡعَ سَمٰوٰتٍ ۚ وَہُوَ بِکُلِّ شَیۡءٍ عَلِیۡمٌ
السَّمَآءِ اسم جنس ہے ایک کے لئے بھی بولا جاتا ہے اور زیادہ کے لئے بھی‘ چونکہ اس کے بعد اس کی طرف جمع کی ضمیر استعمال کی گئی ہے معلوم ہوا کہ یہاں السَّمَآءِ سے جمع مراد ہے۔
سَوّٰی کے معنے کسی چیز کو اس طرح بنانے کے ہوتے ہیں کہ اس میں سب ضرورتوں کا لحاظ رکھا گیا ہو۔ کہتے ہیں سَوّٰیہُ اور اس کے معنے یہ ہوتے ہیں کہ صَنَعَہٗ مُسْتَوِیًا یعنی اس کو ایسا بنایا کہ اس کی ضرورتوں کا لحاظ کر لیا گیا (اقرب)
شَیْئٌ کا ترجمہ اس جگہ بجائے’’چیز‘‘کے ’’بات‘‘کیا گیا ہے۔ کیونکہ اردو میں ’’چیز‘‘ کا لفظ اس موقعہ پر پورا مفہوم ادا نہیں کرتا‘ لیکن ’’بات‘‘ کا لفظ اس مفہوم کو ادا کرتا ہے۔ بات کے معنے اس جگہ قول کے نہیں بلکہ امر اور حقیقت کے ہیں۔
22:66; 31:21; 45:14.
7:55; 10:4; 41:10-13.
Istawa means, he became firm or firmly settled. Istawa ilash-shai’ means, he turned to a thing or he directed his attention to it (Lane).
Sawwa-hu means, he made it uniform or even, congruous or consistent in its several parts; he fashioned it in a suitable manner; he made it adapted to the exigencies, or requirements of its case; he perfected it; or he put it into a right or good state (Lane).
In Arabic "seven" is generally used as a symbol of perfection and the word along with "seventy" or "seven hundred" signifies a large number. All these three words have been used in this sense in the Qur’an (9:80; 15:45). Elsewhere, the words "seven heavens" have been substituted by "seven stages" (23:18).
The sun, the moon and other heavenly bodies are of immense benefit to man. Modern science has made many discoveries in this connection—and many more may yet be made—all of which testify to the truth and comprehensiveness of the Quranic teaching. Science also continues to find more and more properties of things of this earth; many things which were formerly thought to be useless are now known to be highly serviceable to man.
22:66; 31:21; 45:14.
7:55; 10:4; 41:10-13.
Important Words:
استوی (he turned) is derived from سوی meaning, it became straight and even and rightly set. استوی gives the same meaning as سوی. It also means, he became firm or was firmly settled. استوی علی ظھر دابة means, he became firmly seated on the horse or the like. استوی علی العرش means, he (the king) was or became firmly established on the throne. استوی الی الشیء means, he turned to a thing, or he directed his attention to it (Aqrab). استوی gives different meanings when used with regard to two or more things as opposed to when used with regard to one thing only. When used about more than one thing, it means, to be or to become equal; and when used about one thing only it means, to become straight and firm (Mufradat).
سواھن (perfected them) is derived from سوی (Sawwa) which is the transitive form of سوی (sawiya) for which see above. سویmeans, he made it uniform or even; he made it congruous or consistent in its several parts; he fashioned it in a suitable manner; he made it adapted to the exigencies, or requirements, of its case; he perfected it; he made it in a right or good manner; or he put it into a right or good state (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
Whatever is on the earth is created by God for the benefit of man. Elsewhere we read, And He has subjected to you whatsoever is in the heavens and whatsoever is in the earth, all from Himself. In that surely are signs for a people who reflect (45:14). The sun, the moon, and other heavenly bodies are of immense benefit to mankind. Modern science has made many discoveries in this connection and more may yet be made, all of which testify to the truth and comprehensiveness of the Quranic teaching. Science also continues to find more and more the properties of things of this earth; many things which were formerly thought to be useless are now known to be highly serviceable to man.
Again, of all creatures man alone has the knowledge to profit by the things of the world. When so many things have been created to promote the comfort of man and to extend the field of his activities, and when such unlimited provision has been made for his material advance, it cannot be said that there is no purpose in the creation of man or no provision for his spiritual advance.
The verse also hints that the world is the common inheritance of mankind. It should not become the property of one man or one nation. By ignoring this great truth, Europe is now going to rack and ruin.
If the teachings of the Quran are acted upon, envy and malice between individuals and nations will disappear. The ordinances of Islam regarding charity and Zakah are also based upon this conception of the world being the common inheritance of all men. Islam does not disallow the right of private ownership but this is not to be exercised so as to deprive others of their right to the common inheritance.
It should also be noted that, according to most religions, this world is not a desirable place for man. Salvation, according to them, lies in killing desire or escaping from evil and suffering. The Jews, on the other hand, make this world the sole end of life. It is Islam alone that teaches man to use rightly the gifts and opportunities which this world affords and to make them a means of attaining success and salvation in the next.
The words, He it is Who created for you all that is in the earth; then He turned towards the heaven, do not refer to the creation of the earth or the heavens. The verse only purports to say that whatever has been created in the earth is for the benefit of man. Then it goes on to say that those who make good use of the gifts of God will advance to higher and still higher stages of spiritual progress. The words "seven heavens" signify seven stages of spiritual progress, the figure seven, according to Arabic idiom, standing for perfection and completeness. So God has not omitted to provide a place of everlasting spiritual progress, viz. Paradise of the next world.
With this verse concludes the present discussion about the necessity of revelation. The way God has created the universe points to the necessity of revelation. If man is not destined for unlimited spiritual progress for which revelation is the only effective means, there was no need to create the heaven and the earth and whatever is in them for his benefit, nor were the powers and capabilities, with which he has been equipped, necessary for him. All this is to enable him to make endless progress.
a
22:66; 31:21; 45:14.
b
7:55; 10:4; 41:10-13.
31A
اِسْتَوٰی (Istawa) 的意思是他成为坚定的或他坚强地决定了。اِسْتَوٰی اِلَی الشَّیْء (Istawa ilash-shai’) 意谓:他转向一件东西或他注意它 (Lane)
1
السَّمَآءِ اسم جنس ہے ایک کے لئے بھی بولا جاتا ہے اور زیادہ کے لئے بھی‘ چونکہ اس کے بعد اس کی طرف جمع کی ضمیر استعمال کی گئی ہے معلوم ہوا کہ یہاں السَّمَآءِ سے جمع مراد ہے۔
2
سَوّٰی کے معنے کسی چیز کو اس طرح بنانے کے ہوتے ہیں کہ اس میں سب ضرورتوں کا لحاظ رکھا گیا ہو۔ کہتے ہیں سَوّٰیہُ اور اس کے معنے یہ ہوتے ہیں کہ صَنَعَہٗ مُسْتَوِیًا یعنی اس کو ایسا بنایا کہ اس کی ضرورتوں کا لحاظ کر لیا گیا (اقرب)
3
شَیْئٌ کا ترجمہ اس جگہ بجائے’’چیز‘‘کے ’’بات‘‘کیا گیا ہے۔ کیونکہ اردو میں ’’چیز‘‘ کا لفظ اس موقعہ پر پورا مفہوم ادا نہیں کرتا‘ لیکن ’’بات‘‘ کا لفظ اس مفہوم کو ادا کرتا ہے۔ بات کے معنے اس جگہ قول کے نہیں بلکہ امر اور حقیقت کے ہیں۔
a
22:66; 31:21; 45:14.
b
7:55; 10:4; 41:10-13.
36
Important Words:
استوی (he turned) is derived from سوی meaning, it became straight and even and rightly set. استوی gives the same meaning as سوی. It also means, he became firm or was firmly settled. استوی علی ظھر دابة means, he became firmly seated on the horse or the like. استوی علی العرش means, he (the king) was or became firmly established on the throne. استوی الی الشیء means, he turned to a thing, or he directed his attention to it (Aqrab). استوی gives different meanings when used with regard to two or more things as opposed to when used with regard to one thing only. When used about more than one thing, it means, to be or to become equal; and when used about one thing only it means, to become straight and firm (Mufradat).
سواھن (perfected them) is derived from سوی (Sawwa) which is the transitive form of سوی (sawiya) for which see above. سویmeans, he made it uniform or even; he made it congruous or consistent in its several parts; he fashioned it in a suitable manner; he made it adapted to the exigencies, or requirements, of its case; he perfected it; he made it in a right or good manner; or he put it into a right or good state (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
Whatever is on the earth is created by God for the benefit of man. Elsewhere we read, And He has subjected to you whatsoever is in the heavens and whatsoever is in the earth, all from Himself. In that surely are signs for a people who reflect (45:14). The sun, the moon, and other heavenly bodies are of immense benefit to mankind. Modern science has made many discoveries in this connection and more may yet be made, all of which testify to the truth and comprehensiveness of the Quranic teaching. Science also continues to find more and more the properties of things of this earth; many things which were formerly thought to be useless are now known to be highly serviceable to man.
Again, of all creatures man alone has the knowledge to profit by the things of the world. When so many things have been created to promote the comfort of man and to extend the field of his activities, and when such unlimited provision has been made for his material advance, it cannot be said that there is no purpose in the creation of man or no provision for his spiritual advance.
The verse also hints that the world is the common inheritance of mankind. It should not become the property of one man or one nation. By ignoring this great truth, Europe is now going to rack and ruin.
If the teachings of the Quran are acted upon, envy and malice between individuals and nations will disappear. The ordinances of Islam regarding charity and Zakah are also based upon this conception of the world being the common inheritance of all men. Islam does not disallow the right of private ownership but this is not to be exercised so as to deprive others of their right to the common inheritance.
It should also be noted that, according to most religions, this world is not a desirable place for man. Salvation, according to them, lies in killing desire or escaping from evil and suffering. The Jews, on the other hand, make this world the sole end of life. It is Islam alone that teaches man to use rightly the gifts and opportunities which this world affords and to make them a means of attaining success and salvation in the next.
The words, He it is Who created for you all that is in the earth; then He turned towards the heaven, do not refer to the creation of the earth or the heavens. The verse only purports to say that whatever has been created in the earth is for the benefit of man. Then it goes on to say that those who make good use of the gifts of God will advance to higher and still higher stages of spiritual progress. The words "seven heavens" signify seven stages of spiritual progress, the figure seven, according to Arabic idiom, standing for perfection and completeness. So God has not omitted to provide a place of everlasting spiritual progress, viz. Paradise of the next world.
With this verse concludes the present discussion about the necessity of revelation. The way God has created the universe points to the necessity of revelation. If man is not destined for unlimited spiritual progress for which revelation is the only effective means, there was no need to create the heaven and the earth and whatever is in them for his benefit, nor were the powers and capabilities, with which he has been equipped, necessary for him. All this is to enable him to make endless progress.
b
22:66; 31:21; 45:14.
c
7:55; 10:4; 41:10-13.
54
Istawa means, he became firm or firmly settled. Istawa ilash-shai’ means, he turned to a thing or he directed his attention to it (Lane).
55
Sawwa-hu means, he made it uniform or even, congruous or consistent in its several parts; he fashioned it in a suitable manner; he made it adapted to the exigencies, or requirements of its case; he perfected it; or he put it into a right or good state (Lane).
56
In Arabic "seven" is generally used as a symbol of perfection and the word along with "seventy" or "seven hundred" signifies a large number. All these three words have been used in this sense in the Qur’an (9:80; 15:45). Elsewhere, the words "seven heavens" have been substituted by "seven stages" (23:18).
56A
The sun, the moon and other heavenly bodies are of immense benefit to man. Modern science has made many discoveries in this connection—and many more may yet be made—all of which testify to the truth and comprehensiveness of the Quranic teaching. Science also continues to find more and more properties of things of this earth; many things which were formerly thought to be useless are now known to be highly serviceable to man.
اُحِلَّ لَکُمۡ لَیۡلَۃَ الصِّیَامِ الرَّفَثُ اِلٰی نِسَآئِکُمۡ ۚ ہُنَّ لِبَاسٌ لَّکُمۡ وَاَنۡتُمۡ لِبَاسٌ لَّہُنَّ ۗ عَلِمَ اللّٰہُ اَنَّکُمۡ کُنۡتُمۡ تَخۡتَانُوۡنَ اَنۡفُسَکُمۡ فَتَابَ عَلَیۡکُمۡ وَعَفَا عَنۡکُمۡ ۖ فَالۡـٰٔنَ بٰشِرُوۡہُنَّ وَابۡتَغُوۡا مَا کَتَبَ اللّٰہُ لَکُمۡ ۚ وَکُلُوۡا وَاشۡرَبُوۡا حَتّٰی یَتَبَیَّنَ لَکُمُ الۡخَیۡطُ الۡاَبۡیَضُ مِنَ الۡخَیۡطِ الۡاَسۡوَدِ مِنَ الۡفَجۡرِ ۖ ثُمَّ اَتِمُّوا الصِّیَامَ اِلَی الَّیۡلِ ۚ وَلَا تُبٰشِرُوۡہُنَّ وَاَنۡتُمۡ عٰکِفُوۡنَ فِی الۡمَسٰجِدِ ۗ تِلۡکَ حُدُوۡدُ اللّٰہِ فَلَا تَقۡرَبُوۡہَا ۗ کَذٰلِکَ یُبَیِّنُ اللّٰہُ اٰیٰتِہٖ لِلنَّاسِ لَعَلَّہُمۡ یَتَّقُوۡنَ
在这简短的话中 «古兰经» 把妇女的权利和地位、婚姻的目的和意义, 以及夫妇之间的关系描述得多么美好。本节经文大意是说婚姻的真正目的是双方得到舒适、保护和修饰, 因为这就是服装的多种用途 (7:27及16:82)。这肯定不只是性生活的满足。丈夫和妻子还得相互防护邪恶与丑事。
رَفَثَ کے معنے اصل میں جماع کے ذکر کے ہوتے ہیں۔ اس جگہ استعارۃً یہ لفظ جماع کے معنوں میں استعمال کیا گیا ہے۔ مکہ والے سمجھتے تھے کہ روزہ دار کو رات کے وقت بھی اپنی بیوی کے ساتھ تعلق پیدا کرنا جائز نہیں‘ اس کی تردید کی۔
لباس سے یہ مراد ہے کہ خاوند کی وجہ سے لوگ عورت پر الزام لگانے سے ڈرتے ہیں اور عورت کی وجہ سے خاوند پر الزام لگانے سے ڈرتے ہیں پس وہ ایک دوسرے کا لباس ہیں یعنی ایک دوسرے کی حفاظت کرتے ہیں۔
مفسرین کہتے ہیں کہ اس کا مطلب یہ ہے کہ بعض مسلمان باوجود یہ جاننے کے کہ روزہ کی رات میں عورت کے پاس جانا جائز نہیں ایسا کر لیتے تھے۔ پس فرماتا ہے کہ ہم نے یہ حکم اس لئے کھول کر بیان کر دیا ہے کہ تم گناہ میں نہ پڑو۔ لیکن تَخْتَأْ نُوْنَ اَنْفُسَکُمْ کے معنے اپنے نفسوں کی حق تلفی کرنے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور وہی معنے ہم نے اس جگہ کیے ہیں کیونکہ وہ صحابہ ؓ کی شان کے مطابق ہیں اور مطلب یہ ہے کہ گو یہ حکم شرعی نہیں تھا مگر پھر بھی تم اپنی جانوں کو تکلیف میں ڈالنے کی کوشش کرتے تھے۔ اب ہم نے شرعی حکم بتا دیا ہے تاکہ تم خواہ مخواہ اپنے آپ کو تکلیف میں نہ ڈالو۔
عَفَا اللّٰہُ عَنْکَ کے معنے ہیں اَصْلَحَکَ اللّٰہُ وَ اَعَزَّکَ یعنی اللہ تیرے کاموں کو درست کرے اور تجھے عزت دے (اقرب) ہم نے اسی محاورہ کے مطابق عَفَا عَنْـکُمْ کے معنے یہ کیے ہیں۔ کہ اللہ نے تمہاری اس حالت کی اصلاح کردی۔
How beautifully in these brief words the Qur’an has described the rights and status of woman and the object and significance of marriage and conjugal relations. The real object of marriage, the verse purports to say, is the comfort, protection and embellishment of the parties, for such are the uses of a garment (7:27 & 16:82). It definitely is not merely the satisfaction of sexual urge. Husband and wife also safeguard each other against evil and scandal.
The expression ‘Afallahu ‘An-hu means, God corrected his mistake and set right his affairs; bestowed honour upon him. It also means, God afforded him relief (Muhit).
At places where days and nights are unusually long (e.g. near the Poles) day and night should be calculated to be of twelve hours’ duration (Muslim, ch. Ashratus-Sa‘ah).
In I‘tikaf which constitutes, as it were, the consummation of the spirit of fasting, intercourse with wives and preliminaries thereto are not allowed even at night time.
Important Words:
رفث (going in unto) has a number of meanings: amatory talk, kissing, caressing, embracing, compressing, coition, etc.; in fact, everything that a man desires of his wife. When رفث is followed by the preposition الی it means, coition or going in unto one’s wife, and it is in this sense that the word has been used here. رفث also means, immodest, foul and lewd talk or speech (Lane).
تختانون (you have been acting unjustly) is derived from خان. They say خانه i.e. he acted unfaithfully or perfidiously towards him; he was not faithful to the trust reposed in him. اختانه is like خانه, giving the same meaning. It also means, he acted wrongfully or unjustly towards him. The Arabs say خانته رجلاه i.e. his feet or legs acted unfaithfully towards him, meaning he was unable to walk. تختانون انفسکم would, therefore, mean, you failed to give your souls (i.e. yourselves) their due either (1) by preventing them from their duty to God, or (2) by refusing them the satisfaction of their natural and lawful cravings. The former act is a sin, while the latter, though not a sin, may endanger one’s health or deprive one of just happiness. The word has been used in both these senses in the Quran. In 4:108, it has been used in the sense of "sin", while in the present verse it has been used in the sense of "depriving the soul of the gratification of its natural and just desires".
عفاعنکم (afforded you relief). The word عفا gives a number of meanings (see 2:53). The expression عفاالله عن فلان is sometimes used where there is no question of pardoning any sin or obliterating traces thereof but simply in the sense of removing one’s mistake or misunderstanding or improving one’s condition or bestowing honour on one (Aqrab). It also means, making things easy, i.e. affording relief (Muhit).
باشروھن (go in unto them) is derived from بشر from which is also derived the word بشارة or بشری meaning, glad tidings. The expression بشربه means, he became glad and happy because of that. The words بشرالجلد mean, he removed or peeled off its skin. البشرة means, outer part of skin, or what is visible of the face or body. باشرالمرأة means, he came in contact with his wife skin to skin; he went in unto her. البشری (glad tidings) is so called because it changes the colour of the listener’s face. البشر (man) is also so called because, unlike other animals, man’s skin is visible and not concealed under hair (Aqrab, Mufradat & Lane).
Commentary:
It was a custom among the Israelites to abstain from all kinds of food from one evening to the other on the occasion of the fast of the Atonement Day, the only fast prescribed by Moses for his people. When fasts were first prescribed for Muslims, and details had not yet been revealed, they thought that, like the Jews, they too would have to fast for 24 hours with a slight intervening breakfast. Hence, following their own judgement, they concluded that it was lawful for them to eat and drink and to go in unto their wives only as long as they did not go to bed, and that after they had gone to sleep, they were not allowed to partake of any food or drink or to go in unto their wives until the next evening. Bukhari gives the following tradition on the authority of Bara’: "When the command to fast was revealed, if anybody kept a fast and then went to sleep in the evening, he abstained from eating, drinking and sexual intercourse until the time for breaking the fast the following day" (Bukhari ch. on Saum). This tradition and others of the same import show that it was not in obedience to any command from God or the Holy Prophet that his Companions abstained from sexual intercourse after going to bed at night, but it was owing to their own imitation of similar customs among the People of the Book that they had imposed these restrictions on themselves. As, however, these restrictions were against the will of God, a revelation was soon sent down allowing the Faithful to eat and drink and approach their wives as they liked during the night; only they were forbidden to do so while fasting during the day.
Some commentators have inferred from the words, you have been acting unjustly to yourselves, that the Companions of the Holy Prophet were unable to act upon the commandment to abstain from intercourse with their wives during the nights of fasts and frequently broke it. But this is evidently wrong, for the good reason that there was no such commandment to be broken. Moreover, the words of the Quran, i.e. you may now go in, also belie this interpretation, for the use of the word "now" clearly indicates that the Companions of the Holy Prophet were erring not on the side of indulgence but on that of abstinence. The Quran could not obviously say, you may now go in, to a people who were already going in unto their wives.
The clause, they are a garment for you and you are a garment for them, very beautifully describes the object of marriage. The verse points out that the object of marriage is not the gratification of carnal passions. The real object is the comfort, protection and embellishment of the parties, for such are the uses of a garment as explained in 7:27 & 16:82. Thus in a very few words, the Quran has described the true relationship that should exist between husband and wife, a description which has hardly a parallel in any other scripture.
The clause, the white thread becomes distinct from the black thread of the dawn, does not refer to the thread made of yarn but to the streak of light that appears along the eastern horizon at the time of dawn. The verse enjoins that from dawn till sunset Muslims should abstain from food and drink and intercourse while fasting. But they are free to have recourse to these things between sunset and dawn. At places where days and nights are unusually long, i.e. nearer the poles, calculation should be made for the purpose of fasting on the basis of average conditions, i.e. in such a case day and night would each be supposed to be of twelve hours’ duration (Muslim, ch. on Ashratus-Sa‘at). The clause, while you remain in the mosques for devotion, refers to the practice of اعتکاف which is observed by remaining in the mosque, night and day, during the last ten days of Ramadan. During these days, the devotee who decides to observe اعتکاف is not to leave the mosque except from human necessity, i.e. to answer a call of nature, etc. He enters the mosque on the morning of the 20th of Ramadan
and abides therein till the end of the month, fasting from daybreak to sunset and occupying himself in prayer or recitation of the Quran or other religious study or meditation. During اعتکاف (I‘tikaf), which is, as it were, the consummation of the spirit of fasting, intercourse with wives and preliminaries thereto are not allowed even at night time. The clause, these are the limits fixed by Allah, so approach them not, points to the very important principle that a man can attain true piety only if he refrains from even "approaching" the things that have been forbidden by God. "Some acts," says the Holy Prophet "are of doubtful character, one not knowing whether they are right or wrong. It is always better to avoid these. The forbidden things are like a pasture-land which the Wise God prohibits to the people. If you make your beasts graze on the borders of such land, i.e. allow your beasts to approach near them, there is danger of their trespassing upon the prohibited area" (Bukhari, ch, on Iman). This is an extremely wise injunction which cuts at the root of all trespass. Only those can protect themselves against sin who give all unlawful things a wide berth. The final clause, that they may become secure against evil, repeats the idea contained in 2:184 in which the subject of fasting was first introduced. In both verses the underlying object of fasting has been stated to be the attainment of تقوی i.e. piety, righteousness and protection against evil, which are all different forms of divineblessings. The reader may, with advantage, compare this idea with the belief of the Christians that the Law is a curse (Gal. 3:10, 13).
125
在这简短的话中 «古兰经» 把妇女的权利和地位、婚姻的目的和意义, 以及夫妇之间的关系描述得多么美好。本节经文大意是说婚姻的真正目的是双方得到舒适、保护和修饰, 因为这就是服装的多种用途 (7:27及16:82)。这肯定不只是性生活的满足。丈夫和妻子还得相互防护邪恶与丑事。
1
رَفَثَ کے معنے اصل میں جماع کے ذکر کے ہوتے ہیں۔ اس جگہ استعارۃً یہ لفظ جماع کے معنوں میں استعمال کیا گیا ہے۔ مکہ والے سمجھتے تھے کہ روزہ دار کو رات کے وقت بھی اپنی بیوی کے ساتھ تعلق پیدا کرنا جائز نہیں‘ اس کی تردید کی۔
2
لباس سے یہ مراد ہے کہ خاوند کی وجہ سے لوگ عورت پر الزام لگانے سے ڈرتے ہیں اور عورت کی وجہ سے خاوند پر الزام لگانے سے ڈرتے ہیں پس وہ ایک دوسرے کا لباس ہیں یعنی ایک دوسرے کی حفاظت کرتے ہیں۔
3
مفسرین کہتے ہیں کہ اس کا مطلب یہ ہے کہ بعض مسلمان باوجود یہ جاننے کے کہ روزہ کی رات میں عورت کے پاس جانا جائز نہیں ایسا کر لیتے تھے۔ پس فرماتا ہے کہ ہم نے یہ حکم اس لئے کھول کر بیان کر دیا ہے کہ تم گناہ میں نہ پڑو۔ لیکن تَخْتَأْ نُوْنَ اَنْفُسَکُمْ کے معنے اپنے نفسوں کی حق تلفی کرنے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور وہی معنے ہم نے اس جگہ کیے ہیں کیونکہ وہ صحابہ ؓ کی شان کے مطابق ہیں اور مطلب یہ ہے کہ گو یہ حکم شرعی نہیں تھا مگر پھر بھی تم اپنی جانوں کو تکلیف میں ڈالنے کی کوشش کرتے تھے۔ اب ہم نے شرعی حکم بتا دیا ہے تاکہ تم خواہ مخواہ اپنے آپ کو تکلیف میں نہ ڈالو۔
4
عَفَا اللّٰہُ عَنْکَ کے معنے ہیں اَصْلَحَکَ اللّٰہُ وَ اَعَزَّکَ یعنی اللہ تیرے کاموں کو درست کرے اور تجھے عزت دے (اقرب) ہم نے اسی محاورہ کے مطابق عَفَا عَنْـکُمْ کے معنے یہ کیے ہیں۔ کہ اللہ نے تمہاری اس حالت کی اصلاح کردی۔
194
Important Words:
رفث (going in unto) has a number of meanings: amatory talk, kissing, caressing, embracing, compressing, coition, etc.; in fact, everything that a man desires of his wife. When رفث is followed by the preposition الی it means, coition or going in unto one’s wife, and it is in this sense that the word has been used here. رفث also means, immodest, foul and lewd talk or speech (Lane).
تختانون (you have been acting unjustly) is derived from خان. They say خانه i.e. he acted unfaithfully or perfidiously towards him; he was not faithful to the trust reposed in him. اختانه is like خانه, giving the same meaning. It also means, he acted wrongfully or unjustly towards him. The Arabs say خانته رجلاه i.e. his feet or legs acted unfaithfully towards him, meaning he was unable to walk. تختانون انفسکم would, therefore, mean, you failed to give your souls (i.e. yourselves) their due either (1) by preventing them from their duty to God, or (2) by refusing them the satisfaction of their natural and lawful cravings. The former act is a sin, while the latter, though not a sin, may endanger one’s health or deprive one of just happiness. The word has been used in both these senses in the Quran. In 4:108, it has been used in the sense of "sin", while in the present verse it has been used in the sense of "depriving the soul of the gratification of its natural and just desires".
عفاعنکم (afforded you relief). The word عفا gives a number of meanings (see 2:53). The expression عفاالله عن فلان is sometimes used where there is no question of pardoning any sin or obliterating traces thereof but simply in the sense of removing one’s mistake or misunderstanding or improving one’s condition or bestowing honour on one (Aqrab). It also means, making things easy, i.e. affording relief (Muhit).
باشروھن (go in unto them) is derived from بشر from which is also derived the word بشارة or بشری meaning, glad tidings. The expression بشربه means, he became glad and happy because of that. The words بشرالجلد mean, he removed or peeled off its skin. البشرة means, outer part of skin, or what is visible of the face or body. باشرالمرأة means, he came in contact with his wife skin to skin; he went in unto her. البشری (glad tidings) is so called because it changes the colour of the listener’s face. البشر (man) is also so called because, unlike other animals, man’s skin is visible and not concealed under hair (Aqrab, Mufradat & Lane).
Commentary:
It was a custom among the Israelites to abstain from all kinds of food from one evening to the other on the occasion of the fast of the Atonement Day, the only fast prescribed by Moses for his people. When fasts were first prescribed for Muslims, and details had not yet been revealed, they thought that, like the Jews, they too would have to fast for 24 hours with a slight intervening breakfast. Hence, following their own judgement, they concluded that it was lawful for them to eat and drink and to go in unto their wives only as long as they did not go to bed, and that after they had gone to sleep, they were not allowed to partake of any food or drink or to go in unto their wives until the next evening. Bukhari gives the following tradition on the authority of Bara’: "When the command to fast was revealed, if anybody kept a fast and then went to sleep in the evening, he abstained from eating, drinking and sexual intercourse until the time for breaking the fast the following day" (Bukhari ch. on Saum). This tradition and others of the same import show that it was not in obedience to any command from God or the Holy Prophet that his Companions abstained from sexual intercourse after going to bed at night, but it was owing to their own imitation of similar customs among the People of the Book that they had imposed these restrictions on themselves. As, however, these restrictions were against the will of God, a revelation was soon sent down allowing the Faithful to eat and drink and approach their wives as they liked during the night; only they were forbidden to do so while fasting during the day.
Some commentators have inferred from the words, you have been acting unjustly to yourselves, that the Companions of the Holy Prophet were unable to act upon the commandment to abstain from intercourse with their wives during the nights of fasts and frequently broke it. But this is evidently wrong, for the good reason that there was no such commandment to be broken. Moreover, the words of the Quran, i.e. you may now go in, also belie this interpretation, for the use of the word "now" clearly indicates that the Companions of the Holy Prophet were erring not on the side of indulgence but on that of abstinence. The Quran could not obviously say, you may now go in, to a people who were already going in unto their wives.
The clause, they are a garment for you and you are a garment for them, very beautifully describes the object of marriage. The verse points out that the object of marriage is not the gratification of carnal passions. The real object is the comfort, protection and embellishment of the parties, for such are the uses of a garment as explained in 7:27 & 16:82. Thus in a very few words, the Quran has described the true relationship that should exist between husband and wife, a description which has hardly a parallel in any other scripture.
The clause, the white thread becomes distinct from the black thread of the dawn, does not refer to the thread made of yarn but to the streak of light that appears along the eastern horizon at the time of dawn. The verse enjoins that from dawn till sunset Muslims should abstain from food and drink and intercourse while fasting. But they are free to have recourse to these things between sunset and dawn. At places where days and nights are unusually long, i.e. nearer the poles, calculation should be made for the purpose of fasting on the basis of average conditions, i.e. in such a case day and night would each be supposed to be of twelve hours’ duration (Muslim, ch. on Ashratus-Sa‘at). The clause, while you remain in the mosques for devotion, refers to the practice of اعتکاف which is observed by remaining in the mosque, night and day, during the last ten days of Ramadan. During these days, the devotee who decides to observe اعتکاف is not to leave the mosque except from human necessity, i.e. to answer a call of nature, etc. He enters the mosque on the morning of the 20th of Ramadan
and abides therein till the end of the month, fasting from daybreak to sunset and occupying himself in prayer or recitation of the Quran or other religious study or meditation. During اعتکاف (I‘tikaf), which is, as it were, the consummation of the spirit of fasting, intercourse with wives and preliminaries thereto are not allowed even at night time. The clause, these are the limits fixed by Allah, so approach them not, points to the very important principle that a man can attain true piety only if he refrains from even "approaching" the things that have been forbidden by God. "Some acts," says the Holy Prophet "are of doubtful character, one not knowing whether they are right or wrong. It is always better to avoid these. The forbidden things are like a pasture-land which the Wise God prohibits to the people. If you make your beasts graze on the borders of such land, i.e. allow your beasts to approach near them, there is danger of their trespassing upon the prohibited area" (Bukhari, ch, on Iman). This is an extremely wise injunction which cuts at the root of all trespass. Only those can protect themselves against sin who give all unlawful things a wide berth. The final clause, that they may become secure against evil, repeats the idea contained in 2:184 in which the subject of fasting was first introduced. In both verses the underlying object of fasting has been stated to be the attainment of تقوی i.e. piety, righteousness and protection against evil, which are all different forms of divineblessings. The reader may, with advantage, compare this idea with the belief of the Christians that the Law is a curse (Gal. 3:10, 13).
212
How beautifully in these brief words the Qur’an has described the rights and status of woman and the object and significance of marriage and conjugal relations. The real object of marriage, the verse purports to say, is the comfort, protection and embellishment of the parties, for such are the uses of a garment (7:27 & 16:82). It definitely is not merely the satisfaction of sexual urge. Husband and wife also safeguard each other against evil and scandal.
213
The expression ‘Afallahu ‘An-hu means, God corrected his mistake and set right his affairs; bestowed honour upon him. It also means, God afforded him relief (Muhit).
214
At places where days and nights are unusually long (e.g. near the Poles) day and night should be calculated to be of twelve hours’ duration (Muslim, ch. Ashratus-Sa‘ah).
215
In I‘tikaf which constitutes, as it were, the consummation of the spirit of fasting, intercourse with wives and preliminaries thereto are not allowed even at night time.
وَلَا تَاۡکُلُوۡۤا اَمۡوٰلَکُمۡ بَیۡنَکُمۡ بِالۡبٰطِلِ وَتُدۡلُوۡا بِہَاۤ اِلَی الۡحُکَّامِ لِتَاۡکُلُوۡا فَرِیۡقًا مِّنۡ اَمۡوٰلِ النَّاسِ بِالۡاِثۡمِ وَاَنۡتُمۡ تَعۡلَمُوۡنَ
4:30, 162; 9:34.
قرآن کریم اکثر قومی زندگی پر زور دینے کے لئے عام انسانوں یا اپنے اہل ملک یا اہل قوم کی اشیاء کو اپنی اشیاء کہہ کر پکارتا ہے تا اس طرف اشارہ کرے کہ جو اپنی قوم کے افراد کو نقصان پہنچاتا ہے وہ اپنے آپ کو نقصان پہنچاتا ہے۔ یہاں بھی اپنے مال سے مراد دوسرے بنی نوع انسان کے اموال ہیں لیکن مذکورہ بالا اصول کی طرف توجہ دلانے کے لئے اپنے مال کہہ کر انہیں پکارا ہے۔ اس سورت کے رکوع ۱۰ میں فرمایا اِذْ اَخَذْنَا مِیْثَاقَکُمْ لَاتُسْفِکُوْنَ دِمَآءَ کُمْ وَلَاتُخْرِجُوْنَ اَنْفُسَکُمْ مِّنْ دِیَارِکُمْ (البقرۃ: ۸۵) پھر آگے چل کر فرمایا ثُمَّ اَنْتُمْ ھٰٓؤُلَآءِ تَقْت
4:30, 162; 9:34.
In order to emphasize communal or national unity the Qur’an often refers to other Muslims’ property as "your property." So here also other Muslims’ property is spoken of as "your property."
The commandment relating to fasting enjoined Muslims to refrain from eating and drinking within specified periods with a view to attaining piety and righteousness. This was the most opportune time to remind them that unlawful eating, i.e. unlawful acquisition of wealth, must all the more be scrupulously avoided. Incidentally, the verse forcefully condemns the practice of giving and taking bribe.
4:30, 162; 9:34.
Important Words:
تدلوا (offer it) is derived from ادلی which again is derived from دلا. They say دلاالدلو, he let down the bucket (into the well), or he pulled it up. ادلی means, he let down the bucket (into the well.) ادلی الیه بمال means, he offered or gave him money (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The commandment relating to fasting enjoined Muslims to refrain from lawful eating and drinking within specified periods with a view to attaining piety and righteousness. This was thus the most opportune time to remind the people that unlawful eating, i.e. unlawful acquisition of wealth, must be all the more scrupulously avoided. Indeed, one of the greatest evils prevailing in the world is the practice of devouring other men’s property by means of falsehood, fraud and litigation. Many a sin is nothing but an offshoot of this evil. Islam condemns the practice of taking another man’s property without his knowledge or consent. Similarly, it is unlawful to appropriate another person’s possessions by means of false litigation. If a man takes possession of a property that does not belong to him by right, it will prove the ruin of him, even if a court of justice should decree the property as his. Says the Holy Prophet: "Beware! I am but a man like you and it sometimes happens that a litigant comes to me and he is more eloquent than his opponent, and I, after listening to his arguments, may give my decision in his favour. But if the property is really not his, my decision will not make it his in the sight of God; in that case it is nothing but a piece of burning fire; so let him put this fire into his belly if he likes, or let him leave it" (Bukhari).
The verse cuts at the root of the evil that has made its appearance in the present age even among those who lay claim to culture and enlightenment. People generally do not deem it worthwhile to consider what right is. All that is seen is how the judge decides. When a judge awards a property to a man, he eagerly takes possession of it without the slightest compunction, even if it happens not to belong to him by right. It never occurs to him that in the sight of God he is no less a usurper than he who forcibly seizes another man’s property.
Incidentally the verse also forcefully condemns the practice of the giving and taking of bribe which unfortunately is so rampant nowadays. In many countries justice has actually to be bought. What is still worse is that through this evil practice, the door of justice is often closed to a rightful owner. The practice is to be found even in some advanced Western countries and is said to be prevalent in certain parts of the New World. The Holy Prophet has condemned it in the strongest of terms saying: "The taker and giver of a bribe are alike, and both stand accursed" (Tirmidhi).
a
4:30, 162; 9:34.
2
قرآن کریم اکثر قومی زندگی پر زور دینے کے لئے عام انسانوں یا اپنے اہل ملک یا اہل قوم کی اشیاء کو اپنی اشیاء کہہ کر پکارتا ہے تا اس طرف اشارہ کرے کہ جو اپنی قوم کے افراد کو نقصان پہنچاتا ہے وہ اپنے آپ کو نقصان پہنچاتا ہے۔ یہاں بھی اپنے مال سے مراد دوسرے بنی نوع انسان کے اموال ہیں لیکن مذکورہ بالا اصول کی طرف توجہ دلانے کے لئے اپنے مال کہہ کر انہیں پکارا ہے۔ اس سورت کے رکوع ۱۰ میں فرمایا اِذْ اَخَذْنَا مِیْثَاقَکُمْ لَاتُسْفِکُوْنَ دِمَآءَ کُمْ وَلَاتُخْرِجُوْنَ اَنْفُسَکُمْ مِّنْ دِیَارِکُمْ (البقرۃ: ۸۵) پھر آگے چل کر فرمایا ثُمَّ اَنْتُمْ ھٰٓؤُلَآءِ تَقْت
a
4:30, 162; 9:34.
195
Important Words:
تدلوا (offer it) is derived from ادلی which again is derived from دلا. They say دلاالدلو, he let down the bucket (into the well), or he pulled it up. ادلی means, he let down the bucket (into the well.) ادلی الیه بمال means, he offered or gave him money (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The commandment relating to fasting enjoined Muslims to refrain from lawful eating and drinking within specified periods with a view to attaining piety and righteousness. This was thus the most opportune time to remind the people that unlawful eating, i.e. unlawful acquisition of wealth, must be all the more scrupulously avoided. Indeed, one of the greatest evils prevailing in the world is the practice of devouring other men’s property by means of falsehood, fraud and litigation. Many a sin is nothing but an offshoot of this evil. Islam condemns the practice of taking another man’s property without his knowledge or consent. Similarly, it is unlawful to appropriate another person’s possessions by means of false litigation. If a man takes possession of a property that does not belong to him by right, it will prove the ruin of him, even if a court of justice should decree the property as his. Says the Holy Prophet: "Beware! I am but a man like you and it sometimes happens that a litigant comes to me and he is more eloquent than his opponent, and I, after listening to his arguments, may give my decision in his favour. But if the property is really not his, my decision will not make it his in the sight of God; in that case it is nothing but a piece of burning fire; so let him put this fire into his belly if he likes, or let him leave it" (Bukhari).
The verse cuts at the root of the evil that has made its appearance in the present age even among those who lay claim to culture and enlightenment. People generally do not deem it worthwhile to consider what right is. All that is seen is how the judge decides. When a judge awards a property to a man, he eagerly takes possession of it without the slightest compunction, even if it happens not to belong to him by right. It never occurs to him that in the sight of God he is no less a usurper than he who forcibly seizes another man’s property.
Incidentally the verse also forcefully condemns the practice of the giving and taking of bribe which unfortunately is so rampant nowadays. In many countries justice has actually to be bought. What is still worse is that through this evil practice, the door of justice is often closed to a rightful owner. The practice is to be found even in some advanced Western countries and is said to be prevalent in certain parts of the New World. The Holy Prophet has condemned it in the strongest of terms saying: "The taker and giver of a bribe are alike, and both stand accursed" (Tirmidhi).
a
4:30, 162; 9:34.
215A
In order to emphasize communal or national unity the Qur’an often refers to other Muslims’ property as "your property." So here also other Muslims’ property is spoken of as "your property."
216
The commandment relating to fasting enjoined Muslims to refrain from eating and drinking within specified periods with a view to attaining piety and righteousness. This was the most opportune time to remind them that unlawful eating, i.e. unlawful acquisition of wealth, must all the more be scrupulously avoided. Incidentally, the verse forcefully condemns the practice of giving and taking bribe.
وَاَنۡفِقُوۡا فِیۡ سَبِیۡلِ اللّٰہِ وَلَا تُلۡقُوۡا بِاَیۡدِیۡکُمۡ اِلَی التَّہۡلُکَۃِ ۛ وَاَحۡسِنُوۡۤا ۛ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ یُحِبُّ الۡمُحۡسِنِیۡنَ
2:255; 14:32; 47:39; 57:11; 63:11.
2:255; 14:32; 47:39; 57:11; 63:11.
As for the successful prosecution of war money is required, the believers are exhorted to spend freely in the cause of Allah as any hesitancy to do so would result in national ruin.
2:255; 14:32; 47:39; 57:11; 63:11.
Commentary:
As the successful prosecution of war required money, the Faithful are here exhorted to spend in the cause of Allah so that the war which they have been bidden to wage in the defence of their faith may be conducted with efficiency.
The clause, and cast not yourselves into ruin with your own hands, does not mean, as supposed by some ignorant people, that Muslims should spare themselves and do nothing that may endanger their lives. On the contrary, it means that if Muslims will not spend money freely to carry on the war properly, they will be casting themselves into ruins with their own hands; for in that case the enemy will continue to persecute them and will one day wipe them out of existence. This interpretation is borne out by the sayings of some of the Companions themselves (Dawud, Tirmidhi & Jarir).
The clause, and do good, surely Allah loves those who do good, may have four meanings: (1) Either it means, do not spend money yourselves only but give it to your proper brethren also so that they too may be able to take part in the war. (2) Or it means, do not be unjust or cruel to your enemies in your eagerness to bring the war to a speedy end, for Allah loves those who are good to others. Elsewhere the Quran says: Let not the enmity of a people incite you to be unjust. Be just (to all) for that is nearer righteousness, (3) Or it means, think well of your Lord, i.e. do not think that if you spend your money under God’s commandment, He will suffer you to come to ruin thereby. Or (4) it means, perform your duties well and fulfill your obligations faithfully and efficiently. The latter two meanings are supported by the saying of the Companions of the Holy Prophet also (Jarir).
b
2:255; 14:32; 47:39; 57:11; 63:11.
a
2:255; 14:32; 47:39; 57:11; 63:11.
202
Commentary:
As the successful prosecution of war required money, the Faithful are here exhorted to spend in the cause of Allah so that the war which they have been bidden to wage in the defence of their faith may be conducted with efficiency.
The clause, and cast not yourselves into ruin with your own hands, does not mean, as supposed by some ignorant people, that Muslims should spare themselves and do nothing that may endanger their lives. On the contrary, it means that if Muslims will not spend money freely to carry on the war properly, they will be casting themselves into ruins with their own hands; for in that case the enemy will continue to persecute them and will one day wipe them out of existence. This interpretation is borne out by the sayings of some of the Companions themselves (Dawud, Tirmidhi & Jarir).
The clause, and do good, surely Allah loves those who do good, may have four meanings: (1) Either it means, do not spend money yourselves only but give it to your proper brethren also so that they too may be able to take part in the war. (2) Or it means, do not be unjust or cruel to your enemies in your eagerness to bring the war to a speedy end, for Allah loves those who are good to others. Elsewhere the Quran says: Let not the enmity of a people incite you to be unjust. Be just (to all) for that is nearer righteousness, (3) Or it means, think well of your Lord, i.e. do not think that if you spend your money under God’s commandment, He will suffer you to come to ruin thereby. Or (4) it means, perform your duties well and fulfill your obligations faithfully and efficiently. The latter two meanings are supported by the saying of the Companions of the Holy Prophet also (Jarir).
a
2:255; 14:32; 47:39; 57:11; 63:11.
226
As for the successful prosecution of war money is required, the believers are exhorted to spend freely in the cause of Allah as any hesitancy to do so would result in national ruin.
وَاَتِمُّوا الۡحَجَّ وَالۡعُمۡرَۃَ لِلّٰہِ ۚ فَاِنۡ اُحۡصِرۡتُمۡ فَمَا اسۡتَیۡسَرَ مِنَ الۡہَدۡیِ ۖ وَلَا تَحۡلِقُوۡا رُءُوۡسَکُمۡ حَتّٰی یَبۡلُغَ الۡہَدۡیُ مَحِلَّہٗ ۚ فَمَنۡ کَانَ مِنۡکُمۡ مَّرِیۡضًا اَوۡ بِہٖۤ اَذًی مِّنۡ رَّاۡسِہٖ فَفِدۡیَۃٌ مِّنۡ صِیَامٍ اَوۡ صَدَقَۃٍ اَوۡ نُسُکٍ ۚ فَاِذَاۤ اَمِنۡتُمۡ فَمَنۡ تَمَتَّعَ بِالۡعُمۡرَۃِ اِلَی الۡحَجِّ فَمَا اسۡتَیۡسَرَ مِنَ الۡہَدۡیِ ۚ فَمَنۡ لَّمۡ یَجِدۡ فَصِیَامُ ثَلٰثَۃِ اَیَّامٍ فِی الۡحَجِّ وَسَبۡعَۃٍ اِذَا رَجَعۡتُمۡ ۗ تِلۡکَ عَشَرَۃٌ کَامِلَۃٌ ۗ ذٰلِکَ لِمَنۡ لَّمۡ یَکُنۡ اَہۡلُہٗ حَاضِرِی الۡمَسۡجِدِ الۡحَرَامِ ۚ وَاتَّقُوا اللّٰہَ وَاعۡلَمُوۡۤا اَنَّ اللّٰہَ شَدِیۡدُ الۡعِقَابِ
48:26.
本节经文以 حَجْ (Hajj, 朝觐) 这一论题开首, جِهَاد (Jihad, 为主道抗战) 和朝觐似乎相互有关, 两者构成了忠实和真诚的信者在安拉道上所必须经受的牺牲举动, 这是从2:178开始的一个论题。朝觐是人类精神发展的最后阶段, 其他各阶段如祈祷、斋戒和为真主的道路抗战已经得到了讨论。
عُمْرَة (‘Umrah, 小朝) 在于按上述方式穿朝圣服,环绕天房七次, 在萨法 (صَفَا, Safa) 和玛尔瓦 (مَرْوَة, Marwah) 之间奔跑, 并供奉牺牲, 可是这牺牲并不是必须做的。小朝可以在一年中的任何时候履行, حَجْ (Hajj, 大朝) 只在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 伊历十二月) 中履行。
小朝和大朝可以按两种方式结合: (a) 打算只履行小朝的朝觐者应进入 Ihram (穿朝圣服者必须遵守的约法规定),并履行它的礼仪至其终结。然后在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah) 十二月的第八天,他应再进入Ihram,履行大朝的规定礼仪。这种小朝 (副朝) 同大朝 (正朝) 相结合的方式宗教学术上称为 تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘, 连朝), تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘) 的字面意义是 “利用一种事物”。(b) 朝觐者可以同时履行副朝和正朝。在此情况下, 他应以那样的意向进入 Ihram 并应在那仪式中继续到朝觐结束。这种正朝同副朝的相结合叫做 قِرَان (Qiran, 双朝), قِرَان (Qiran)的字面上的意义是 “把两件事物合并为一。” 在连朝和双朝中都必须供奉牺牲。在注释的本节经文中 تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘) 这词不是按术语意义的用法, 而 قِرَان (Qiran) 也同样。
在 “应当在朝觐期间斋戒三天” 这一句中所说的斋戒与以上所说的斋戒是截然不同的。起先提到的斋戒是对那些不能理发的人们来说的, 而这斋戒是对在连朝时无力宰牲者而说的。所说的三天最好是 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 十二月) 11, 12和13日。其余的七天斋戒可以在他回家后完成。
此话意指允许正朝和副朝的相结合不是针对麦加的居住者而是针对外来者的。可是, 某些人已把 “圣寺” 一词扩大到包括整个圣地, 即包括麦加内及麦加周围的圣地。
حَتّٰی یَبْلُغَ الْھَدْیُ مَحِلَّہٗ اس پر بحث کی گئی ہے کہ مَحِلَّہٗ سے کیا مراد ہے۔ امام شافعیؒ اور امام مالکؒ کے نزدیک تو وہ جگہ ہے جہاں پر حاجی کو روک دیا گیا ہو۔ اور امام ابوحنیفہؒ کے نزدیک حرم ہے۔ میرے نزدیک اگر بیماری کے سبب سے حاجی روکا گیا ہو تو قربانی کے حرم پہنچنے تک سر نہ منڈوائے۔ اور اگر کوئی دشمن حج میں مانع ہو جائے تو جہاں روکا جائے وہیں قربانی کرکے حلق کر دے۔
مِنْ تعلیل کے لئے ہوتا ہے جیسے مِمَّا خَطِیْئٰتِھِمْ اُغْرِقُوْا (نوح : ۲۶) یہاں بھی یہی معنے ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے مناسب ہیں۔
قرآن کریم نے تینوں اقسام فدیہ کو غیر معین رکھا ہے مگر رسول کریمؐ کے ارشاد سے اس کی تعیین ہو جاتی ہے۔ چنانچہ آپؐ نے کعب بن عُجرہ کوحکم فرمایا کہ سر منڈوادیں اور چھ مسکینوں کو کھانا کھلا دیں یا ایک بکرا قربانی کر دیں یا تین دن کے روزے رکھیں۔
اِلَی الْحَجِّ : اِلٰی کے معنے کبھی مَعَ یعنی ساتھ کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اس جگہ یہی معنے ہیں۔ اکثر کوفی اور بصریوں کی ایک جماعت آیت مَنْ اَنْصَارِیْ اِلَی اللّٰہِ میں بھی اِلٰی کے معنے مَعَ کے ہی کرتی ہے۔ (مُغْنی اللَّبِیب)
48:26.
With this verse begins the subject of Hajj (Pilgrimage). Jihad and Hajj seem to be correlated and both constitute a form of sacrifice which a true and sincere believer has to undergo in the way of Allah, a subject which began with 2:178. The Pilgrimage is the last stage in the spiritual development of man, the other stages such as Prayer, Fasting and Jihad having already been discussed.
The ‘Umrah or the Lesser Pilgrimage consists in entering into a stage of Ihram in the way mentioned above, circuiting the Ka‘bah seven times, running between Safa and Marwah and offering a sacrifice which, however, is not obligatory. The ‘Umrah may be performed at any time of the year, whereas the Hajj or the Greater Pilgrimage is performed only during the month of Dhul-Hijjah.
The words, if you are kept back, refer to a state of affairs when a would-be pilgrim is prevented by disease, or a state of war, or by some other cause, from visiting the Ka‘bah to perform the Hajj or the ‘Umrah.
The ‘Umrah and the Hajj may be combined in two ways: (a) The pilgrim who intends to perform the ‘Umrah alone should enter into the state of Ihram and perform its rites and finish it. Then on the eighth day of Dhul- Hijjah he should again enter into the state of Ihram and perform the prescribed rites of Hajj. This form of combining the ‘Umrah and the Hajj is technically called Tamattu‘ which literally means, "availing oneself of a thing." (b) The pilgrim may perform the ‘Umrah and the Hajj simultaneously. He should, in this case, enter into the state of Ihram with that intention and should remain in that state till the end of the Pilgrimage. This combination of Hajj and ‘Umrah is called Qiran which literally means, "the putting together of two things." In both Tamattu‘ and Qiran it is obligatory to offer the sacrifice. In the verse under comment the word Tamattu‘ is not used in the technical sen
Fasting is mentioned in the clause, should fast three days during the Pilgrimage, is distinct and separate from the fasting mentioned above. The first-mentioned fasting is meant for those who cannot shave their heads while this fasting is meant for those who are unable to offer sacrifice in case of Tamattu‘. The three days spoken of are preferably the 11th, 12th and 13th of Dhul-Hijjah. The remaining seven fasts may be observed after one has returned home.
The words mean that the permission to combine Hajj and ‘Umrah is meant not for the residents of Mecca but for those who come from outside. By some, however, the words "the Sacred Mosque" have been extended to include the whole of Haram, i.e. the sacred territory in and around Mecca.
48:26.
Commentary:
From this verse begin commandments relating to حج or the Pilgrimage. The Pilgrimage is performed in the following manner: The would-be pilgrim enters into a state of احرام (Ihram) on reaching the میقات i.e. certain prescribed places slightly varying in distance in different directions, but in all cases outside حرم (the Sacred Territory). In the state of احرامthe pilgrim is forbidden sexual intercourse, the use of scent or perfumed oil, the wearing of sewn garments, hunting and the like. The male pilgrim discards ordinary clothes, putting on white unsewn sheets and keeping the head uncovered. The female pilgrim may put on ordinary but simple clothes and should ordinarily keep her face uncovered. The pilgrim (male or female) is required to repeat the following words as often as possible: Labbaik, Allahumma labbaik, Labbaik. La sharika laka labbaik. Innal-hamda wanni‘mata laka wal mulka la sharika laka…” i.e. "My Lord! I am at Thy service. There is no equal or partner with Thee. So I am at Thy service alone. All praise belongs to Thee and all blessings are from Thee and all authority rests in Thee. I say again, there is no equal or partner with Thee. So I am at Thy service alone."
At Mecca the first thing the pilgrim does, preferably after having a bath, is to perform seven circuits round the Ka’bah then he briskly walks or runs between the Safa and the Marwah (see 2:159) seven times. On the eighth day of Dhul-Hijjah (the month of Pilgrimage) he goes in the morning from Mecca to Mina, which is about three miles from Mecca, where he halts to perform, at their appointed time, the five daily Prayers, beginning from the midday Prayer. Next morning (i.e. the 9th) he starts from Mina and passing through, or by, Mash‘arul-Haram, which is about six miles from Mecca, he goes on to the great plain at ‘Arafat, three miles further ahead, where, before he actually enters ‘Arafat, he says the midday and the afternoon Prayers together; and when all the pilgrims have entered ‘Arafat, the Imam delivers a sermon, while the pilgrims do nothing but silently pray and stand still. Thereafter the pilgrim returns after sunset to Muzdalifah or Mash‘ar where he says the evening and the night Prayers together and spends most of his time in prayer and meditation. Next day (i.e. the 10th) after offering his morning Prayer at Mash‘arul-Haram he starts back early for Mina, where he casts pebbles (seven in number) at the three appointed pillars beginning with the Jamratul-‘Aqabah, repeating this each day that he stays at Mina. The same day, i.e. the 10th, the pilgrim offers his sacrifice (goat, sheep, ram, cow, camel, etc.), gets his head shaved, takes a bath and puts on his ordinary clothes. Thereafter he proceeds to Mecca and again performs the circuit of the Ka‘bah seven times and then returns to Mina if he should so desire. The stay at Mina may last from part of a day to three or four days known as ایام معدودات (i.e. the numbered days) with which the Hajj is completed. All this time the pilgrim should repeat, as many times as possible, the above mentioned prayer.
عمرة or the Lesser Pilgrimage consists in entering into a state of احرام (Ihram) in the way described above, circuiting the Ka‘bah seven times, running between the Safa and the Marwah and offering a sacrifice which, however, is not obligatory. ‘Umrah may be performed at any time of the year, whereas the Hajj or the Greater Pilgrimage is performed only during the month of Dhul-Hijjah. For the literal meanings of the words Hajj and ‘Umrah see note on 2:159.
The words, If you are kept back, refer to a state of affairs when a would-be pilgrim is prevented by disease, or a state of war, or some other cause, from visiting the Ka‘bah to perform the Hajj or the ‘Umrah. In this case the pilgrim may refrain from proceeding further and should sacrifice whatever offering is easily available, i.e. a goat, a sheep, a cow, or a camel, etc. But he should not shave his head until the offering reaches its destination, the idea being to remain in the state of Ihram until the offering reaches Mina which is the place meant for it. If, however, the offering cannot be sent to Mecca, it may be sacrificed by the pilgrim at the place where he is detained and the meat either consumed by the pilgrim himself or distributed among friends, relatives, neighbours, etc. It will be noted that the offering of a sacrifice is obligatory only when a would-be pilgrim is prevented from completing his Hajj or ‘Umrah. In ordinary circumstances when a person performs a Hajj or an ‘Umrah separately, it is only supererogatory, becoming obligatory only when the Hajj and the ‘Umrah are combined.
The clause, should make an expiation either by fasting or almsgiving or a sacrifice, relates to such people as cannot shave their heads owing to some ailment. The alternatives mentioned are meant to suit different grades of people. Fasting is meant for the poor; feeding the needy for the pilgrims of the middle class; and the offering of a sacrifice for the rich. The Quran does not fix the number of days for which one is to fast, or the number of the poor whom one is to feed or the kind of animal which one is to sacrifice. The Holy Prophet is reported to have once prescribed fasting for three days (i.e. three one-day fasts), and the feeding of six poor men and the offering of a goat as a sacrifice (Bukhari).
The words, when you are safe, mean, when the war is over, or when other obstacles are removed. In such case it is open to a person to proceed to Mecca with the intention of performing ‘Umrah and then stay on to perform Hajj in the ensuing month of Dhul-Hijjah. This is what is referred to in the words: who would avail himself of ‘Umrah together with the Hajj.
‘Umrah and Hajj may be combined in two ways: One way is for the would-be pilgrim to make up his mind to perform the ‘Umrah only and enter into the state of Ihram with that intention, and then perform its rites and finish it. After that on the eighth day of Dhul-Hijjah one should again enter into the state of Ihram and then perform the prescribed rites of Hajj. This form of combining the ‘Umrah and the Hajj is technically called Tamattu‘ which literally means, "availing oneself of a thing".
The second way is that a man should make up his mind to perform the ‘Umrah and Hajj simultaneously. He should, in this case, enter into the state of Ihram with that intention and should remain in that state till the end of the Pilgrimage. This combination of Hajj and ‘Umrah is called قران (Qiran) which literally means, "the putting together of two things". In both Tamattu‘ and Qiran it is obligatory to offer the sacrifice, while in the case of Hajj alone or in the case of ‘Umrah alone, the offering of the sacrifice is not obligatory. In the verse under comment the word تمتع is not used in the technical sense and covers قران also.
The fasting mentioned in the clause, should fast three days during the Pilgrimage, is distinct and separate from the fasting mentioned above. The first-mentioned fasting was meant for those who cannot shave their heads, while this fasting is meant for those who are unable to offer a sacrifice in case of Tamattu‘. The three days spoken of are preferably the 11th, 12th and 13th of Dhul-Hijjah. The remaining seven fasts may be observed after one has returned home.
The clause, this is for him whose family does not reside near the Sacred Mosque, means that the permission to combine Hajj with ‘Umrah is meant not for the residents of Mecca but for those who come from outside. By some, however, the words "the Sacred Mosque" have been extended to include the whole of حرم i.e. the Sacred Territory in and around Mecca.
The final clause, fear Allah and know that Allah is severe in punishing, has a twofold meaning: (1) That Muslims should not think that these are mere minor details of certain outward rites and may therefore not be strictly observed; for all these things which the All-Knowing God has prescribed for the Faithful are necessary in His sight and are meant for their own good. So, whoever neglects these details not only incurs the displeasure of God, but also hinders his own spiritual progress. (2) That the performance of Hajj should not fill the heart with pride (which unfortunately is very often the case nowadays), for this would defeat the very object of Pilgrimage which is the attainment of تقوی or fear of God. In such case, the so-called pilgrim will not find himself nearer God but rather would see His punishment descending on him.
In connection with this verse, it should also be noted that besides giving a general meaning as stated above, it also refers to a specific incident in Islamic history, i.e. the Truce of Hudaibiyyah. The verse was revealed before that truce and hinted that a time was coming when Muslims would start towards Mecca with the intention of performing Pilgrimage, but they would be "kept back" from doing so by disbelievers. Later, however, God would grant them victory over the disbelievers and they would be "safe" to perform the Pilgrimage in peace. What a true picture of the apparent set-back at Hudaibiyyah and the subsequent Fall of Mecca at the hands of the Holy Prophet!
c
48:26.
134
本节经文以 حَجْ (Hajj, 朝觐) 这一论题开首, جِهَاد (Jihad, 为主道抗战) 和朝觐似乎相互有关, 两者构成了忠实和真诚的信者在安拉道上所必须经受的牺牲举动, 这是从2:178开始的一个论题。朝觐是人类精神发展的最后阶段, 其他各阶段如祈祷、斋戒和为真主的道路抗战已经得到了讨论。
135
عُمْرَة (‘Umrah, 小朝) 在于按上述方式穿朝圣服,环绕天房七次, 在萨法 (صَفَا, Safa) 和玛尔瓦 (مَرْوَة, Marwah) 之间奔跑, 并供奉牺牲, 可是这牺牲并不是必须做的。小朝可以在一年中的任何时候履行, حَجْ (Hajj, 大朝) 只在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 伊历十二月) 中履行。
136
小朝和大朝可以按两种方式结合: (a) 打算只履行小朝的朝觐者应进入 Ihram (穿朝圣服者必须遵守的约法规定),并履行它的礼仪至其终结。然后在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah) 十二月的第八天,他应再进入Ihram,履行大朝的规定礼仪。这种小朝 (副朝) 同大朝 (正朝) 相结合的方式宗教学术上称为 تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘, 连朝), تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘) 的字面意义是 “利用一种事物”。(b) 朝觐者可以同时履行副朝和正朝。在此情况下, 他应以那样的意向进入 Ihram 并应在那仪式中继续到朝觐结束。这种正朝同副朝的相结合叫做 قِرَان (Qiran, 双朝), قِرَان (Qiran)的字面上的意义是 “把两件事物合并为一。” 在连朝和双朝中都必须供奉牺牲。在注释的本节经文中 تَمَتُّعْ (Tamattu‘) 这词不是按术语意义的用法, 而 قِرَان (Qiran) 也同样。
137
在 “应当在朝觐期间斋戒三天” 这一句中所说的斋戒与以上所说的斋戒是截然不同的。起先提到的斋戒是对那些不能理发的人们来说的, 而这斋戒是对在连朝时无力宰牲者而说的。所说的三天最好是 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 十二月) 11, 12和13日。其余的七天斋戒可以在他回家后完成。
138
此话意指允许正朝和副朝的相结合不是针对麦加的居住者而是针对外来者的。可是, 某些人已把 “圣寺” 一词扩大到包括整个圣地, 即包括麦加内及麦加周围的圣地。
1
حَتّٰی یَبْلُغَ الْھَدْیُ مَحِلَّہٗ اس پر بحث کی گئی ہے کہ مَحِلَّہٗ سے کیا مراد ہے۔ امام شافعیؒ اور امام مالکؒ کے نزدیک تو وہ جگہ ہے جہاں پر حاجی کو روک دیا گیا ہو۔ اور امام ابوحنیفہؒ کے نزدیک حرم ہے۔ میرے نزدیک اگر بیماری کے سبب سے حاجی روکا گیا ہو تو قربانی کے حرم پہنچنے تک سر نہ منڈوائے۔ اور اگر کوئی دشمن حج میں مانع ہو جائے تو جہاں روکا جائے وہیں قربانی کرکے حلق کر دے۔
2
مِنْ تعلیل کے لئے ہوتا ہے جیسے مِمَّا خَطِیْئٰتِھِمْ اُغْرِقُوْا (نوح : ۲۶) یہاں بھی یہی معنے ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے مناسب ہیں۔
3
قرآن کریم نے تینوں اقسام فدیہ کو غیر معین رکھا ہے مگر رسول کریمؐ کے ارشاد سے اس کی تعیین ہو جاتی ہے۔ چنانچہ آپؐ نے کعب بن عُجرہ کوحکم فرمایا کہ سر منڈوادیں اور چھ مسکینوں کو کھانا کھلا دیں یا ایک بکرا قربانی کر دیں یا تین دن کے روزے رکھیں۔
4
اِلَی الْحَجِّ : اِلٰی کے معنے کبھی مَعَ یعنی ساتھ کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اس جگہ یہی معنے ہیں۔ اکثر کوفی اور بصریوں کی ایک جماعت آیت مَنْ اَنْصَارِیْ اِلَی اللّٰہِ میں بھی اِلٰی کے معنے مَعَ کے ہی کرتی ہے۔ (مُغْنی اللَّبِیب)
a
48:26.
203
Commentary:
From this verse begin commandments relating to حج or the Pilgrimage. The Pilgrimage is performed in the following manner: The would-be pilgrim enters into a state of احرام (Ihram) on reaching the میقات i.e. certain prescribed places slightly varying in distance in different directions, but in all cases outside حرم (the Sacred Territory). In the state of احرامthe pilgrim is forbidden sexual intercourse, the use of scent or perfumed oil, the wearing of sewn garments, hunting and the like. The male pilgrim discards ordinary clothes, putting on white unsewn sheets and keeping the head uncovered. The female pilgrim may put on ordinary but simple clothes and should ordinarily keep her face uncovered. The pilgrim (male or female) is required to repeat the following words as often as possible: Labbaik, Allahumma labbaik, Labbaik. La sharika laka labbaik. Innal-hamda wanni‘mata laka wal mulka la sharika laka…” i.e. "My Lord! I am at Thy service. There is no equal or partner with Thee. So I am at Thy service alone. All praise belongs to Thee and all blessings are from Thee and all authority rests in Thee. I say again, there is no equal or partner with Thee. So I am at Thy service alone."
At Mecca the first thing the pilgrim does, preferably after having a bath, is to perform seven circuits round the Ka’bah then he briskly walks or runs between the Safa and the Marwah (see 2:159) seven times. On the eighth day of Dhul-Hijjah (the month of Pilgrimage) he goes in the morning from Mecca to Mina, which is about three miles from Mecca, where he halts to perform, at their appointed time, the five daily Prayers, beginning from the midday Prayer. Next morning (i.e. the 9th) he starts from Mina and passing through, or by, Mash‘arul-Haram, which is about six miles from Mecca, he goes on to the great plain at ‘Arafat, three miles further ahead, where, before he actually enters ‘Arafat, he says the midday and the afternoon Prayers together; and when all the pilgrims have entered ‘Arafat, the Imam delivers a sermon, while the pilgrims do nothing but silently pray and stand still. Thereafter the pilgrim returns after sunset to Muzdalifah or Mash‘ar where he says the evening and the night Prayers together and spends most of his time in prayer and meditation. Next day (i.e. the 10th) after offering his morning Prayer at Mash‘arul-Haram he starts back early for Mina, where he casts pebbles (seven in number) at the three appointed pillars beginning with the Jamratul-‘Aqabah, repeating this each day that he stays at Mina. The same day, i.e. the 10th, the pilgrim offers his sacrifice (goat, sheep, ram, cow, camel, etc.), gets his head shaved, takes a bath and puts on his ordinary clothes. Thereafter he proceeds to Mecca and again performs the circuit of the Ka‘bah seven times and then returns to Mina if he should so desire. The stay at Mina may last from part of a day to three or four days known as ایام معدودات (i.e. the numbered days) with which the Hajj is completed. All this time the pilgrim should repeat, as many times as possible, the above mentioned prayer.
عمرة or the Lesser Pilgrimage consists in entering into a state of احرام (Ihram) in the way described above, circuiting the Ka‘bah seven times, running between the Safa and the Marwah and offering a sacrifice which, however, is not obligatory. ‘Umrah may be performed at any time of the year, whereas the Hajj or the Greater Pilgrimage is performed only during the month of Dhul-Hijjah. For the literal meanings of the words Hajj and ‘Umrah see note on 2:159.
The words, If you are kept back, refer to a state of affairs when a would-be pilgrim is prevented by disease, or a state of war, or some other cause, from visiting the Ka‘bah to perform the Hajj or the ‘Umrah. In this case the pilgrim may refrain from proceeding further and should sacrifice whatever offering is easily available, i.e. a goat, a sheep, a cow, or a camel, etc. But he should not shave his head until the offering reaches its destination, the idea being to remain in the state of Ihram until the offering reaches Mina which is the place meant for it. If, however, the offering cannot be sent to Mecca, it may be sacrificed by the pilgrim at the place where he is detained and the meat either consumed by the pilgrim himself or distributed among friends, relatives, neighbours, etc. It will be noted that the offering of a sacrifice is obligatory only when a would-be pilgrim is prevented from completing his Hajj or ‘Umrah. In ordinary circumstances when a person performs a Hajj or an ‘Umrah separately, it is only supererogatory, becoming obligatory only when the Hajj and the ‘Umrah are combined.
The clause, should make an expiation either by fasting or almsgiving or a sacrifice, relates to such people as cannot shave their heads owing to some ailment. The alternatives mentioned are meant to suit different grades of people. Fasting is meant for the poor; feeding the needy for the pilgrims of the middle class; and the offering of a sacrifice for the rich. The Quran does not fix the number of days for which one is to fast, or the number of the poor whom one is to feed or the kind of animal which one is to sacrifice. The Holy Prophet is reported to have once prescribed fasting for three days (i.e. three one-day fasts), and the feeding of six poor men and the offering of a goat as a sacrifice (Bukhari).
The words, when you are safe, mean, when the war is over, or when other obstacles are removed. In such case it is open to a person to proceed to Mecca with the intention of performing ‘Umrah and then stay on to perform Hajj in the ensuing month of Dhul-Hijjah. This is what is referred to in the words: who would avail himself of ‘Umrah together with the Hajj.
‘Umrah and Hajj may be combined in two ways: One way is for the would-be pilgrim to make up his mind to perform the ‘Umrah only and enter into the state of Ihram with that intention, and then perform its rites and finish it. After that on the eighth day of Dhul-Hijjah one should again enter into the state of Ihram and then perform the prescribed rites of Hajj. This form of combining the ‘Umrah and the Hajj is technically called Tamattu‘ which literally means, "availing oneself of a thing".
The second way is that a man should make up his mind to perform the ‘Umrah and Hajj simultaneously. He should, in this case, enter into the state of Ihram with that intention and should remain in that state till the end of the Pilgrimage. This combination of Hajj and ‘Umrah is called قران (Qiran) which literally means, "the putting together of two things". In both Tamattu‘ and Qiran it is obligatory to offer the sacrifice, while in the case of Hajj alone or in the case of ‘Umrah alone, the offering of the sacrifice is not obligatory. In the verse under comment the word تمتع is not used in the technical sense and covers قران also.
The fasting mentioned in the clause, should fast three days during the Pilgrimage, is distinct and separate from the fasting mentioned above. The first-mentioned fasting was meant for those who cannot shave their heads, while this fasting is meant for those who are unable to offer a sacrifice in case of Tamattu‘. The three days spoken of are preferably the 11th, 12th and 13th of Dhul-Hijjah. The remaining seven fasts may be observed after one has returned home.
The clause, this is for him whose family does not reside near the Sacred Mosque, means that the permission to combine Hajj with ‘Umrah is meant not for the residents of Mecca but for those who come from outside. By some, however, the words "the Sacred Mosque" have been extended to include the whole of حرم i.e. the Sacred Territory in and around Mecca.
The final clause, fear Allah and know that Allah is severe in punishing, has a twofold meaning: (1) That Muslims should not think that these are mere minor details of certain outward rites and may therefore not be strictly observed; for all these things which the All-Knowing God has prescribed for the Faithful are necessary in His sight and are meant for their own good. So, whoever neglects these details not only incurs the displeasure of God, but also hinders his own spiritual progress. (2) That the performance of Hajj should not fill the heart with pride (which unfortunately is very often the case nowadays), for this would defeat the very object of Pilgrimage which is the attainment of تقوی or fear of God. In such case, the so-called pilgrim will not find himself nearer God but rather would see His punishment descending on him.
In connection with this verse, it should also be noted that besides giving a general meaning as stated above, it also refers to a specific incident in Islamic history, i.e. the Truce of Hudaibiyyah. The verse was revealed before that truce and hinted that a time was coming when Muslims would start towards Mecca with the intention of performing Pilgrimage, but they would be "kept back" from doing so by disbelievers. Later, however, God would grant them victory over the disbelievers and they would be "safe" to perform the Pilgrimage in peace. What a true picture of the apparent set-back at Hudaibiyyah and the subsequent Fall of Mecca at the hands of the Holy Prophet!
b
48:26.
227
With this verse begins the subject of Hajj (Pilgrimage). Jihad and Hajj seem to be correlated and both constitute a form of sacrifice which a true and sincere believer has to undergo in the way of Allah, a subject which began with 2:178. The Pilgrimage is the last stage in the spiritual development of man, the other stages such as Prayer, Fasting and Jihad having already been discussed.
228
The ‘Umrah or the Lesser Pilgrimage consists in entering into a stage of Ihram in the way mentioned above, circuiting the Ka‘bah seven times, running between Safa and Marwah and offering a sacrifice which, however, is not obligatory. The ‘Umrah may be performed at any time of the year, whereas the Hajj or the Greater Pilgrimage is performed only during the month of Dhul-Hijjah.
229
The words, if you are kept back, refer to a state of affairs when a would-be pilgrim is prevented by disease, or a state of war, or by some other cause, from visiting the Ka‘bah to perform the Hajj or the ‘Umrah.
230
The ‘Umrah and the Hajj may be combined in two ways: (a) The pilgrim who intends to perform the ‘Umrah alone should enter into the state of Ihram and perform its rites and finish it. Then on the eighth day of Dhul- Hijjah he should again enter into the state of Ihram and perform the prescribed rites of Hajj. This form of combining the ‘Umrah and the Hajj is technically called Tamattu‘ which literally means, "availing oneself of a thing." (b) The pilgrim may perform the ‘Umrah and the Hajj simultaneously. He should, in this case, enter into the state of Ihram with that intention and should remain in that state till the end of the Pilgrimage. This combination of Hajj and ‘Umrah is called Qiran which literally means, "the putting together of two things." In both Tamattu‘ and Qiran it is obligatory to offer the sacrifice. In the verse under comment the word Tamattu‘ is not used in the technical sen
231
Fasting is mentioned in the clause, should fast three days during the Pilgrimage, is distinct and separate from the fasting mentioned above. The first-mentioned fasting is meant for those who cannot shave their heads while this fasting is meant for those who are unable to offer sacrifice in case of Tamattu‘. The three days spoken of are preferably the 11th, 12th and 13th of Dhul-Hijjah. The remaining seven fasts may be observed after one has returned home.
232
The words mean that the permission to combine Hajj and ‘Umrah is meant not for the residents of Mecca but for those who come from outside. By some, however, the words "the Sacred Mosque" have been extended to include the whole of Haram, i.e. the sacred territory in and around Mecca.
وَلَا تَنۡکِحُوا الۡمُشۡرِکٰتِ حَتّٰی یُؤۡمِنَّ ۚ وَلَاَمَۃٌ مُّؤۡمِنَۃٌ خَیۡرٌ مِّنۡ مُّشۡرِکَۃٍ وَّلَوۡ اَعۡجَبَتۡکُمۡ ۗ وَلَا تُنۡکِحُوا الۡمُشۡرِکِیۡنَ حَتّٰی یُؤۡمِنُوۡا ۚ وَلَعَبۡدٌ مُّؤۡمِنٌ خَیۡرٌ مِّنۡ مُّشۡرِکٍ وَّلَوۡ اَعۡجَبَکُمۡ ۗ اُولٰٓئِکَ یَدۡعُوۡنَ اِلَی النَّارِ ۖ وَاللّٰہُ یَدۡعُوۡۤا اِلَی الۡجَنَّۃِ وَالۡمَغۡفِرَۃِ بِاِذۡنِہٖ ۖ وَیُبَیِّنُ اٰیٰتِہٖ لِلنَّاسِ لَعَلَّہُمۡ یَتَذَکَّرُوۡنَ
60:11.
کیونکہ وہ جسم اور روح دونوں کے آرام کا خیال رکھ سکتی ہے۔
کیونکہ غلام کی اسلام میں تحقیر جائز نہیں اور جب وہ مسلم بھی ہو تو مسلم عورت کے لئے جسمانی اور روحانی طور پر زیادہ مفید ہوگا۔
60:11.
The question of marriage with "idolatrous women" is intimately connected with the subject of war, for it is during war that, being away from their homes for a considerable time, believers are liable to be tempted to contract marriages with such women. This, the Qur’an positively prohibits, as also the giving of believing women in marriage to idolatrous men. The prohibition is based on religious as well as on moral and social grounds. An idolatrous husband is bound to exercise an extremely baneful influence, not only on his wife but also on the children born of this union; and an idolatrous wife is sure to ruin the up-bringing of the offspring. Moreover, when a believing man has an idolatrous wife or vice versa, their ideas, beliefs and outlook on life being widely different, there can possibly exist no harmony or concord between the two and consequently no peace in the family. In Islam slavery carries no stigma of inferiority; and a Muslim bondwoman would in every respect be a better spouse for a Muslim
60:11.
Important Words:
تنکحوا––tankihu (marry) and تنکحوا––tunkihu (give in marriage) are both derived from نکح. They say نکح المطرالارض i.e. the rain fell on the earth and became mixed with the soil. نکح امرأة means, he married a woman. نکح زوجته means, he went in unto his wife. نکح المرأة امرء means, the woman married a man. انکح المرأة زیدا means, he gave the woman in marriage to Zaid. Thus نکاح means, both (1) marriage and (2) coition with one’s wife. The Quran itself uses the word in the latter sense in 2:231 (Aqrab & Mufradat).
مشرك (an idolater) is derived from شرك. They say شرکه فیه meaning, he shared the thing with him; he became his co-partner in it. اشرکه فی الامر means, he made him his co-partner in the affair. اشرك الیه means, he attributed to, or set up with, him a co-partner. شریك means, a sharer, or a co-partner, or an associate, or a colleague, Thus مشرك means, one who attributes to, or sets up with, God a co-partner or co-partners, allotting to the latter all or some of the attributes of the former. شرك means, attributing to, or setting up with, God co-partners idolatry (Lane). شرك is of two kinds: شرك عظیم (the greater idolatry) signifying belief in a person or thing as being co-partner with God, and شرك صغیر (the lesser idolatry), i.e. ascribing to some person or thing any of the attributes of God without looking upon him or it as His co-partner (Mufradat). Other relevant terms are شرك جلی i.e. manifest idolatry, and شرك خفی i.e. hidden idolatry; and شرك فی الذات i.e. believing one to be a co-partner with God in His person, and شرك فی الصفات i.e. ascribing any of the attributes of God to someone. The term مشرکین (idolaters) is generally confined to such peoples as set up co-partners with God and do not believe in any revealed Book.
Commentary:
The question of marriage with "idolatrous women" is intimately connected with the subject of war, for it is during war that Muslims, being away from their homes for a considerable time, are liable to be tempted to contract marriages with such women. This the Quran strictly disallows in the verse under comment, which also forbids the giving of believing women in marriage to idolatrous men. The prohibition is based on religions as well as on moral and social grounds. An idolatrous husband is bound to exercise an extremely baneful influence not only on his wife but on his children as well, whereas an idolatrous wife is sure to ruin the early training of the offspring. Moreover, when a believing man has an idolatrous wife or vice versa, their ideas, beliefs, culture and outlook on life being widely different, there cannot possibly be harmony or concord between the two and their life is sure to become miserable, if they possess any attachment whatever for their religion. Again Islam, (submission to One God) and shirk (setting up partners with God) being poles apart, there can be no real contact or permanent intermixing between the two. In this connection, it may be noted that Islam allows, though it certainly does not encourage, the marriage of a Muslim with a woman belonging to the People of the Book who are decidedly nearer to Islam (5:6). But of this we will speak when we come to the relevant verses.
The words, until they believe, appear to be redundant at first sight; for, if marriage with an idolatrous person is prohibited, it is evident that this prohibition will automatically cease to operate when an idolatrous person converted to Islam. On deeper thought, however, the words, until they believe, prove to be most rightly placed. They have indeed been used to remind Muslims of their duty pertaining to the conversion of idolatrous people to Islam. The words also contain a veiled prophecy that the time was fast coming when idolatry would become extinct in Arabia.
The expression باذنه (by His command) when used with regard to a certain action of God signifies, according to the Quranic idiom, that God has provided or intends to provide extraordinary means for the accomplishment of the thing aimed at. So is the case here, the clause signifying that Allah’s call to Heaven and to forgiveness is not an empty announcement but that He has made special arrangements to bring about the desired end. It is further interesting to note that the word جنة and مغفرة both convey the sense of covering up a thing, the idea being that God’s favours and His forgiveness will be so liberal and so generous as to cover or overwhelm believers.
b
60:11.
1
کیونکہ وہ جسم اور روح دونوں کے آرام کا خیال رکھ سکتی ہے۔
2
کیونکہ غلام کی اسلام میں تحقیر جائز نہیں اور جب وہ مسلم بھی ہو تو مسلم عورت کے لئے جسمانی اور روحانی طور پر زیادہ مفید ہوگا۔
a
60:11.
228
Important Words:
تنکحوا––tankihu (marry) and تنکحوا––tunkihu (give in marriage) are both derived from نکح. They say نکح المطرالارض i.e. the rain fell on the earth and became mixed with the soil. نکح امرأة means, he married a woman. نکح زوجته means, he went in unto his wife. نکح المرأة امرء means, the woman married a man. انکح المرأة زیدا means, he gave the woman in marriage to Zaid. Thus نکاح means, both (1) marriage and (2) coition with one’s wife. The Quran itself uses the word in the latter sense in 2:231 (Aqrab & Mufradat).
مشرك (an idolater) is derived from شرك. They say شرکه فیه meaning, he shared the thing with him; he became his co-partner in it. اشرکه فی الامر means, he made him his co-partner in the affair. اشرك الیه means, he attributed to, or set up with, him a co-partner. شریك means, a sharer, or a co-partner, or an associate, or a colleague, Thus مشرك means, one who attributes to, or sets up with, God a co-partner or co-partners, allotting to the latter all or some of the attributes of the former. شرك means, attributing to, or setting up with, God co-partners idolatry (Lane). شرك is of two kinds: شرك عظیم (the greater idolatry) signifying belief in a person or thing as being co-partner with God, and شرك صغیر (the lesser idolatry), i.e. ascribing to some person or thing any of the attributes of God without looking upon him or it as His co-partner (Mufradat). Other relevant terms are شرك جلی i.e. manifest idolatry, and شرك خفی i.e. hidden idolatry; and شرك فی الذات i.e. believing one to be a co-partner with God in His person, and شرك فی الصفات i.e. ascribing any of the attributes of God to someone. The term مشرکین (idolaters) is generally confined to such peoples as set up co-partners with God and do not believe in any revealed Book.
Commentary:
The question of marriage with "idolatrous women" is intimately connected with the subject of war, for it is during war that Muslims, being away from their homes for a considerable time, are liable to be tempted to contract marriages with such women. This the Quran strictly disallows in the verse under comment, which also forbids the giving of believing women in marriage to idolatrous men. The prohibition is based on religions as well as on moral and social grounds. An idolatrous husband is bound to exercise an extremely baneful influence not only on his wife but on his children as well, whereas an idolatrous wife is sure to ruin the early training of the offspring. Moreover, when a believing man has an idolatrous wife or vice versa, their ideas, beliefs, culture and outlook on life being widely different, there cannot possibly be harmony or concord between the two and their life is sure to become miserable, if they possess any attachment whatever for their religion. Again Islam, (submission to One God) and shirk (setting up partners with God) being poles apart, there can be no real contact or permanent intermixing between the two. In this connection, it may be noted that Islam allows, though it certainly does not encourage, the marriage of a Muslim with a woman belonging to the People of the Book who are decidedly nearer to Islam (5:6). But of this we will speak when we come to the relevant verses.
The words, until they believe, appear to be redundant at first sight; for, if marriage with an idolatrous person is prohibited, it is evident that this prohibition will automatically cease to operate when an idolatrous person converted to Islam. On deeper thought, however, the words, until they believe, prove to be most rightly placed. They have indeed been used to remind Muslims of their duty pertaining to the conversion of idolatrous people to Islam. The words also contain a veiled prophecy that the time was fast coming when idolatry would become extinct in Arabia.
The expression باذنه (by His command) when used with regard to a certain action of God signifies, according to the Quranic idiom, that God has provided or intends to provide extraordinary means for the accomplishment of the thing aimed at. So is the case here, the clause signifying that Allah’s call to Heaven and to forgiveness is not an empty announcement but that He has made special arrangements to bring about the desired end. It is further interesting to note that the word جنة and مغفرة both convey the sense of covering up a thing, the idea being that God’s favours and His forgiveness will be so liberal and so generous as to cover or overwhelm believers.
b
60:11.
267
The question of marriage with "idolatrous women" is intimately connected with the subject of war, for it is during war that, being away from their homes for a considerable time, believers are liable to be tempted to contract marriages with such women. This, the Qur’an positively prohibits, as also the giving of believing women in marriage to idolatrous men. The prohibition is based on religious as well as on moral and social grounds. An idolatrous husband is bound to exercise an extremely baneful influence, not only on his wife but also on the children born of this union; and an idolatrous wife is sure to ruin the up-bringing of the offspring. Moreover, when a believing man has an idolatrous wife or vice versa, their ideas, beliefs and outlook on life being widely different, there can possibly exist no harmony or concord between the two and consequently no peace in the family. In Islam slavery carries no stigma of inferiority; and a Muslim bondwoman would in every respect be a better spouse for a Muslim
وَالَّذِیۡنَ یُتَوَفَّوۡنَ مِنۡکُمۡ وَیَذَرُوۡنَ اَزۡوٰجًا وَّصِیَّۃً لِّاَزۡوٰجِہِمۡ مَّتٰعًا اِلَی الۡحَوۡلِ غَیۡرَ اِخۡرَاجٍ ۚ فَاِنۡ خَرَجۡنَ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَیۡکُمۡ فِیۡ مَا فَعَلۡنَ فِیۡۤ اَنۡفُسِہِنَّ مِنۡ مَّعۡرُوۡفٍ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ عَزِیۡزٌ حَکِیۡمٌ
وَصِیَّۃً مصدر ہے۔ اس کے پہلے یُوْصُوْنَ محذوف سمجھا جائے گا‘ یعنی وہ وصیت کر جائیں۔ مَتَاعًا دوسرا مصدر ہے۔ اس سے پہلے بھی اَنْ مَتِّعُوْھُنَّ محذوف ہے اور معنے یہ ہیں کہ یہ وصیت کر جائیں کہ بعد میں وہ لوگ جن کے ہاتھ میں وصیت کا اجرا ہے انہیں ایک سال تک فائدہ پہنچائیں۔ اس کے بعد غَیْرَ اِخْرَاجٍ کے الفاظ ہیں جو بدل ہیں متاع کا۔ پس معنے یہ ہوئے کہ فائدہ پہنچانے سے مراد ہماری یہ ہے کہ ان کو گھروں سے نہ نکالیں بلکہ باوجود اس کے کہ مکان کسی اور وارث کے حصہ میں آیا ہو بیویوں کو ایک سال تک اس میں رہنے کا حق حاصل رہے۔ اس کے یہ معنے نہیں کہ عورت خود بھی
مَعْرُوْف کے معنے قانون یا فطرت یا قومی رواج کے مطابق کے ہیں‘ یعنی جسے لوگ جانتے ہیں۔ اس جگہ اس کے معنے پسندیدہ کے اور بہتر کے ہیں۔ مطلب یہ ہے کہ خواہ عدت کے بعد عورتیں نکاح کریں خواہ اپنے والدین یا دوسرے رشتہ داروں کے ہاں چلی جائیں یا کوئی نوکری اختیار کریں تم پر کوئی اعتراض نہیں۔ اور اس حکم کے رو سے تمہیں نہیں چاہییٔ کہ انہیں روکو۔
2:235.
The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned here is only a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. The concession forms no part of her share in the inheritance, nor is it an obligatory injunction.
2:235.
Commentary:
The middle verses, which came in like the middle Prayer, having ended, the Quran reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse under comment is erroneously believed by some to have been abrogated by 2:235 and 4:13. Apart from the fact that the abrogation theory is based on lack of the knowledge of true teaching of the Quran, there is nothing in the verses referred to above which contradicts the provision contained in the present verse. The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned in the present verse has nothing to do with the above-mentioned period of waiting, as the words, but if they themselves go out, there shall be no blame upon you; clearly show. The present verse only contains a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. One year is about the time conveniently required by a widow for making suitable arrangements about her future. It is also the requisite time for a pregnant widow to be delivered of the child and relieved of the encumbrances attending thereto. Nor has this verse anything to do with the share of a widow in the property left by her husband as stated in 4:13. The concession about residence and maintenance for one year mentioned in the present verse forms no part of her share in the inheritance. The verse contains no obligatory injunction, but only an additional exhortation to the heirs of the deceased person to show special kindness to the widow for a period of one year, just as the following verse embodies an identical exhortation in favour of a divorced woman.
d
2:235.
190
2:235经文中为寡妇所制定的四个月零十天的待婚期中, 她有权要求她亡夫的那些继承人给她住所和生活费。这里谈的一年, 只是在2:235节经文中所提到她的住所和生活费权利以外为期一年的同样权利是特殊的优惠。
3
وَصِیَّۃً مصدر ہے۔ اس کے پہلے یُوْصُوْنَ محذوف سمجھا جائے گا‘ یعنی وہ وصیت کر جائیں۔ مَتَاعًا دوسرا مصدر ہے۔ اس سے پہلے بھی اَنْ مَتِّعُوْھُنَّ محذوف ہے اور معنے یہ ہیں کہ یہ وصیت کر جائیں کہ بعد میں وہ لوگ جن کے ہاتھ میں وصیت کا اجرا ہے انہیں ایک سال تک فائدہ پہنچائیں۔ اس کے بعد غَیْرَ اِخْرَاجٍ کے الفاظ ہیں جو بدل ہیں متاع کا۔ پس معنے یہ ہوئے کہ فائدہ پہنچانے سے مراد ہماری یہ ہے کہ ان کو گھروں سے نہ نکالیں بلکہ باوجود اس کے کہ مکان کسی اور وارث کے حصہ میں آیا ہو بیویوں کو ایک سال تک اس میں رہنے کا حق حاصل رہے۔ اس کے یہ معنے نہیں کہ عورت خود بھی
4
مَعْرُوْف کے معنے قانون یا فطرت یا قومی رواج کے مطابق کے ہیں‘ یعنی جسے لوگ جانتے ہیں۔ اس جگہ اس کے معنے پسندیدہ کے اور بہتر کے ہیں۔ مطلب یہ ہے کہ خواہ عدت کے بعد عورتیں نکاح کریں خواہ اپنے والدین یا دوسرے رشتہ داروں کے ہاں چلی جائیں یا کوئی نوکری اختیار کریں تم پر کوئی اعتراض نہیں۔ اور اس حکم کے رو سے تمہیں نہیں چاہییٔ کہ انہیں روکو۔
a
2:235.
247
Commentary:
The middle verses, which came in like the middle Prayer, having ended, the Quran reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse under comment is erroneously believed by some to have been abrogated by 2:235 and 4:13. Apart from the fact that the abrogation theory is based on lack of the knowledge of true teaching of the Quran, there is nothing in the verses referred to above which contradicts the provision contained in the present verse. The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned in the present verse has nothing to do with the above-mentioned period of waiting, as the words, but if they themselves go out, there shall be no blame upon you; clearly show. The present verse only contains a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. One year is about the time conveniently required by a widow for making suitable arrangements about her future. It is also the requisite time for a pregnant widow to be delivered of the child and relieved of the encumbrances attending thereto. Nor has this verse anything to do with the share of a widow in the property left by her husband as stated in 4:13. The concession about residence and maintenance for one year mentioned in the present verse forms no part of her share in the inheritance. The verse contains no obligatory injunction, but only an additional exhortation to the heirs of the deceased person to show special kindness to the widow for a period of one year, just as the following verse embodies an identical exhortation in favour of a divorced woman.
a
2:235.
298
The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned here is only a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. The concession forms no part of her share in the inheritance, nor is it an obligatory injunction.
۞ اَلَمۡ تَرَ اِلَی الَّذِیۡنَ خَرَجُوۡا مِنۡ دِیٰرِہِمۡ وَہُمۡ اُلُوۡفٌ حَذَرَ الۡمَوۡتِ فَقَالَ لَہُمُ اللّٰہُ مُوۡتُوۡا ثُمَّ اَحۡیٰہُمۡ ۚ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ لَذُوۡ فَضۡلٍ عَلَی النَّاسِ وَلٰکِنَّ اَکۡثَرَ النَّاسِ لَا یَشۡکُرُوۡنَ
5:27.
اَلَّذِیْنَ خَرَجُوْا مِنْ دِیَارِھِمْ سے مراد بنی اسرائیل ہیں جو فرعون کے ڈر کی وجہ سے مصر سے نکل آئے تھے۔ وَھُمْ اُلُوْفٌ میں بتایا کہ وہ ہزاروں تھے۔ اس سے بائیبل کے اس بیان کی تردید ہو جاتی ہے کہ بنی اسرائیل کی تعداد جو مصر سے نکلے تھے چھ لاکھ تین ہزار پانچ سو پچاس تھی۔ کیونکہ چھ لاکھ کا قافلہ بغیر زیادہ سامان کے بے آب و گیاہ جنگل میں سے سینکڑوں میل تک نہیں گزر سکتا۔
’’مرجاؤ‘‘ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ تمہاری نافرمانی کی وجہ سے تم سے فاتحانہ طاقتیں واپس لی جاتی ہیں۔ مگر بعد میں خداتعالیٰ نے معاف کر دیا اور ان کے غالب آنے کی قوتیں انہیں واپس دے دیں۔
5:27.
When, being persecuted by Pharaoh, the Israelites left Egypt and crossed over to Asia, Moses wanted them to enter the Promised Land, but they were afraid of the people that dwelt there and refused to march ahead (5:25).
The Bible represents the number of the Israelites migrating from Egypt as six hundred thousand. Recent researches favour the Quranic view according to which they were only several thousand (History of the People of Israel, by Ernest Renan. p. 145, 1888, and History of Palestine and the Jews, i. 174, by John Kitto). See also 2:61.
The Israelites left Egypt because their further stay in that country would have meant their total annihilation. Pharaoh had recourse to all sorts of means to destroy their manhood. See 2:50.
The reference is to the wandering in the wilderness of Sinai of the Israelites who had refused to march with Moses into Canaan until they perished in the wilderness and a new generation arose who, inspired with a new life, marched into the Promised Land under Joshua. Elsewhere the Qur’an says, "Then we raised you up after your death" (2:57).
5:27.
Commentary:
The commandments relating to conjugal relations were mentioned as an offshoot of the subject of جھاد (holy war) dealt with in 2:217 and the following verses. The Quran now reverts to the original subject and by way of re-introduction cites the example of the Israelites who had left the land of the Pharaohs for fear of death. Trodden under the foot of the tyrant, the children of Israel were then in a most abject condition, and the wise God, in His eternal wisdom, decreed that they should lead a life of ordeals in the wilderness before becoming fit for the great life that awaited them in the Promised Land. The words, Allah said to them: 'Die', point to the great truth that all life must be preceded by death, i.e. great trials and extraordinary sacrifices.
As mentioned above, the clause, those who went forth from their homes, refers to the Israelites who had gone forth from Egypt to escape persecution by Pharaoh. It was the fear of death which had made the Israelites migrate from the land (2:50).
The words, they were thousands, contradict the Bible which represents the number of the Israelites migrating from Egypt as six hundred thousand. Recent researches favour the Quranic view (See History of the People of Israel, p. 145, by Ernest Renan, London, 1888, and History of Palestine and the Jews, i. 174 by John Kitto, London, 1844). See also. 2:55.
The story of the exodus of the Israelites is briefly this. When, being persecuted by Pharaoh, they left Egypt and crossed over to Asia, Moses wanted them to enter the Promised Land, but they were afraid of the people that dwelt there and refused to march ahead, saying Go thou and thy Lord and fight and here we sit (5:25). The result was that they drew upon themselves the wrath of God, Who said to Moses, Verily, it shall be forbidden them for forty years; in distraction shall they wander through the land (5:27). The promise was thus put off for forty years and the children of Israel were left to wander in the wilderness until those who had refused to fight perished in the desert, whereafter the younger generation led by Joshua conquered the land. Thus it was that the people whom God had caused to perish had new life breathed into them. It is with reference to these events that the Quran uses the word "die" in the verse under comment. This very death, i.e. destruction of the rebellious and training of the youth through trials and ordeals, proved the forerunner of life. Elsewhere, the Quran says about the Israelites: Then We raised you up after your death (2:57).
It may also be noted here that from this verse onward, the Quran begins the description of تزکیة or means of national progress spoken of in 2:130, reference to "Signs" and "the Book" and "Wisdom" having already been made.
a
5:27.
5
اَلَّذِیْنَ خَرَجُوْا مِنْ دِیَارِھِمْ سے مراد بنی اسرائیل ہیں جو فرعون کے ڈر کی وجہ سے مصر سے نکل آئے تھے۔ وَھُمْ اُلُوْفٌ میں بتایا کہ وہ ہزاروں تھے۔ اس سے بائیبل کے اس بیان کی تردید ہو جاتی ہے کہ بنی اسرائیل کی تعداد جو مصر سے نکلے تھے چھ لاکھ تین ہزار پانچ سو پچاس تھی۔ کیونکہ چھ لاکھ کا قافلہ بغیر زیادہ سامان کے بے آب و گیاہ جنگل میں سے سینکڑوں میل تک نہیں گزر سکتا۔
6
’’مرجاؤ‘‘ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ تمہاری نافرمانی کی وجہ سے تم سے فاتحانہ طاقتیں واپس لی جاتی ہیں۔ مگر بعد میں خداتعالیٰ نے معاف کر دیا اور ان کے غالب آنے کی قوتیں انہیں واپس دے دیں۔
b
5:27.
250
Commentary:
The commandments relating to conjugal relations were mentioned as an offshoot of the subject of جھاد (holy war) dealt with in 2:217 and the following verses. The Quran now reverts to the original subject and by way of re-introduction cites the example of the Israelites who had left the land of the Pharaohs for fear of death. Trodden under the foot of the tyrant, the children of Israel were then in a most abject condition, and the wise God, in His eternal wisdom, decreed that they should lead a life of ordeals in the wilderness before becoming fit for the great life that awaited them in the Promised Land. The words, Allah said to them: 'Die', point to the great truth that all life must be preceded by death, i.e. great trials and extraordinary sacrifices.
As mentioned above, the clause, those who went forth from their homes, refers to the Israelites who had gone forth from Egypt to escape persecution by Pharaoh. It was the fear of death which had made the Israelites migrate from the land (2:50).
The words, they were thousands, contradict the Bible which represents the number of the Israelites migrating from Egypt as six hundred thousand. Recent researches favour the Quranic view (See History of the People of Israel, p. 145, by Ernest Renan, London, 1888, and History of Palestine and the Jews, i. 174 by John Kitto, London, 1844). See also. 2:55.
The story of the exodus of the Israelites is briefly this. When, being persecuted by Pharaoh, they left Egypt and crossed over to Asia, Moses wanted them to enter the Promised Land, but they were afraid of the people that dwelt there and refused to march ahead, saying Go thou and thy Lord and fight and here we sit (5:25). The result was that they drew upon themselves the wrath of God, Who said to Moses, Verily, it shall be forbidden them for forty years; in distraction shall they wander through the land (5:27). The promise was thus put off for forty years and the children of Israel were left to wander in the wilderness until those who had refused to fight perished in the desert, whereafter the younger generation led by Joshua conquered the land. Thus it was that the people whom God had caused to perish had new life breathed into them. It is with reference to these events that the Quran uses the word "die" in the verse under comment. This very death, i.e. destruction of the rebellious and training of the youth through trials and ordeals, proved the forerunner of life. Elsewhere, the Quran says about the Israelites: Then We raised you up after your death (2:57).
It may also be noted here that from this verse onward, the Quran begins the description of تزکیة or means of national progress spoken of in 2:130, reference to "Signs" and "the Book" and "Wisdom" having already been made.
a
5:27.
300
When, being persecuted by Pharaoh, the Israelites left Egypt and crossed over to Asia, Moses wanted them to enter the Promised Land, but they were afraid of the people that dwelt there and refused to march ahead (5:25).
301
The Bible represents the number of the Israelites migrating from Egypt as six hundred thousand. Recent researches favour the Quranic view according to which they were only several thousand (History of the People of Israel, by Ernest Renan. p. 145, 1888, and History of Palestine and the Jews, i. 174, by John Kitto). See also 2:61.
302
The Israelites left Egypt because their further stay in that country would have meant their total annihilation. Pharaoh had recourse to all sorts of means to destroy their manhood. See 2:50.
303
The reference is to the wandering in the wilderness of Sinai of the Israelites who had refused to march with Moses into Canaan until they perished in the wilderness and a new generation arose who, inspired with a new life, marched into the Promised Land under Joshua. Elsewhere the Qur’an says, "Then we raised you up after your death" (2:57).
اَلَمۡ تَرَ اِلَی الۡمَلَاِ مِنۡۢ بَنِیۡۤ اِسۡرٰٓءِیۡلَ مِنۡۢ بَعۡدِ مُوۡسٰۤی اِذۡ قَالُوۡا لِنَبِیٍّ لَّہُمُ ابۡعَثۡ لَنَا مَلِکًا نُّقٰتِلۡ فِیۡ سَبِیۡلِ اللّٰہِ ۖ قَالَ ہَلۡ عَسَیۡتُمۡ اِنۡ کُتِبَ عَلَیۡکُمُ الۡقِتَالُ اَلَّا تُقٰتِلُوۡا ۖ قَالُوۡا وَمَا لَنَاۤ اَلَّا نُقٰتِلَ فِیۡ سَبِیۡلِ اللّٰہِ وَقَدۡ اُخۡرِجۡنَا مِنۡ دِیٰرِنَا وَاَبۡنَآئِنَا ۖ فَلَمَّا کُتِبَ عَلَیۡہِمُ الۡقِتَالُ تَوَلَّوۡا اِلَّا قَلِیۡلًا مِّنۡہُمۡ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ عَلِیۡمٌۢ بِالظّٰلِمِیۡنَ
4:78.
دیکھئے پرانا عہدنامہ کتاب قاضیوں باب۶ آیت ۷ و ۸۔
عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہیں ’’تم قریب ہو‘‘ اور ھَلْ عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہوئے ’’کیا تم اس امر کے قریب ہو‘‘ مگر اردو میں اس ترجمہ کے کوئی معنے نہیں بنتے۔ اس لئے لفظی ترجمہ کی بجائے اس کا بامحاورہ ترجمہ کر دیا گیا ہے۔
عربی میں صرف قَلِیْل کا لفظ ہے مگر عربی کے قاعدہ کی رو سے یہاں جماعت وغیرہ کے ہم معنی کوئی لفظ محذوف ہے۔ اردو میں اگر صرف قلیل رکھا جائے تو بے معنے ہو جاتا ہے۔ اس لئے ’’جماعت‘‘ کا لفظ عام قاعدہ کے خلاف خطوط میں نہیں لکھا گیا۔ بلکہ ظاہر میں لکھا گیا ہے۔
استثناء میں ’’سب‘‘ کا لفظ پہلے حصہ جملہ میں مقدر ہوتا ہے۔ اس جگہ اس کے ظاہر کرنے کے بغیر معنے واضح نہیں ہوتے۔
4:78.
The incident mentioned indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites at the time to which this verse relates compared with the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Qur’an relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse they are reported to have said, What reason have we that we should not fight in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons. The improvement, however, was only verbal rather than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of them wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
4:78.
Important Words:
الملاء (chiefs) is derived from ملاء. They say ملاء الاناء بالماء i.e. he filled the vessel with water. ملی رعبا means, he was filled with fright. الملاء means: (1) assembly of persons; (2) chiefs and nobles, for they fill the eyes and hearts of the commoners withawe and admiration; or because with them a meeting becomes full and appears to be properly attended. الملاء الاعلی means, the community of high placed angels (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Quran now proceeds to give the story of how the different tribes of Israel were welded into one great nation, also noting incidentally the weaknesses displayed by them, so that their example may serve as a lesson to Muslims.
The incident mentioned in the verse under comment indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites in the time to which this verse relates over that of the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Quran relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse the Israelites are reported to have said, What reason have we to abstain from fighting in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons? The improvement, however, was more verbal than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of these people wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
d
4:78.
3
دیکھئے پرانا عہدنامہ کتاب قاضیوں باب۶ آیت ۷ و ۸۔
4
عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہیں ’’تم قریب ہو‘‘ اور ھَلْ عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہوئے ’’کیا تم اس امر کے قریب ہو‘‘ مگر اردو میں اس ترجمہ کے کوئی معنے نہیں بنتے۔ اس لئے لفظی ترجمہ کی بجائے اس کا بامحاورہ ترجمہ کر دیا گیا ہے۔
5
عربی میں صرف قَلِیْل کا لفظ ہے مگر عربی کے قاعدہ کی رو سے یہاں جماعت وغیرہ کے ہم معنی کوئی لفظ محذوف ہے۔ اردو میں اگر صرف قلیل رکھا جائے تو بے معنے ہو جاتا ہے۔ اس لئے ’’جماعت‘‘ کا لفظ عام قاعدہ کے خلاف خطوط میں نہیں لکھا گیا۔ بلکہ ظاہر میں لکھا گیا ہے۔
6
استثناء میں ’’سب‘‘ کا لفظ پہلے حصہ جملہ میں مقدر ہوتا ہے۔ اس جگہ اس کے ظاہر کرنے کے بغیر معنے واضح نہیں ہوتے۔
a
4:78.
253
Important Words:
الملاء (chiefs) is derived from ملاء. They say ملاء الاناء بالماء i.e. he filled the vessel with water. ملی رعبا means, he was filled with fright. الملاء means: (1) assembly of persons; (2) chiefs and nobles, for they fill the eyes and hearts of the commoners withawe and admiration; or because with them a meeting becomes full and appears to be properly attended. الملاء الاعلی means, the community of high placed angels (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Quran now proceeds to give the story of how the different tribes of Israel were welded into one great nation, also noting incidentally the weaknesses displayed by them, so that their example may serve as a lesson to Muslims.
The incident mentioned in the verse under comment indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites in the time to which this verse relates over that of the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Quran relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse the Israelites are reported to have said, What reason have we to abstain from fighting in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons? The improvement, however, was more verbal than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of these people wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
a
4:78.
306
The incident mentioned indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites at the time to which this verse relates compared with the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Qur’an relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse they are reported to have said, What reason have we that we should not fight in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons. The improvement, however, was only verbal rather than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of them wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
اَللّٰہُ وَلِیُّ الَّذِیۡنَ اٰمَنُوۡا یُخۡرِجُہُمۡ مِّنَ الظُّلُمٰتِ اِلَی النُّوۡرِ ۖ وَالَّذِیۡنَ کَفَرُوۡۤا اَوۡلِیَآؤُہُمُ الطّٰغُوۡتُ یُخۡرِجُوۡنَہُمۡ مِّنَ النُّوۡرِ اِلَی الظُّلُمٰتِ ۗ اُولٰٓئِکَ اَصۡحٰبُ النَّارِ ۖ ہُمۡ فِیۡہَا خٰلِدُوۡنَ
اَخْرَجَ کے معنے تو نکالنے کے ہیں لیکن جب اس کے بعد مِنْ اور اِلٰی آئیں تو اس کے معنے ایک حالت سے نکال کر دوسری حالت کی طرف لے جانے کے ہوتے ہیں۔
45:20.
5:17; 65:12.
7:28; 16:101.
3:69.
5:17; 65:12.
7:28; 16:101.
Commentary:
The preceding verse spoke of "truth" and "error" as resulting from belief in Allah and belief in Taghut respectively. The present verse further develops the idea. According to Arabic idiom, the expression, to bring out of darkness into light, means, "to lead to success and happiness not only in the spiritual but also in the physical sense"; and the opposite of it means, "to lead to failure and grief".
The word Taghut, explained under the preceding verse, here mainly refers to such mischievous leaders as turn people away from the right path. Through them disbelievers are being led to failure and grief and are also gradually losing whatever light of faith they possessed before the advent of the Holy Prophet. Their rejection of him has also led them to disown many truths which they acknowledged before. Add to this their deprivation of the light of the new faith and the darkness becomes complete. On the contrary, Islam is not only bringing new light to its adherents but is also bringing them success and happiness.
b
45:20.
c
5:17; 65:12.
d
7:28; 16:101.
7
اَخْرَجَ کے معنے تو نکالنے کے ہیں لیکن جب اس کے بعد مِنْ اور اِلٰی آئیں تو اس کے معنے ایک حالت سے نکال کر دوسری حالت کی طرف لے جانے کے ہوتے ہیں۔
a
3:69.
b
5:17; 65:12.
c
7:28; 16:101.
264
Commentary:
The preceding verse spoke of "truth" and "error" as resulting from belief in Allah and belief in Taghut respectively. The present verse further develops the idea. According to Arabic idiom, the expression, to bring out of darkness into light, means, "to lead to success and happiness not only in the spiritual but also in the physical sense"; and the opposite of it means, "to lead to failure and grief".
The word Taghut, explained under the preceding verse, here mainly refers to such mischievous leaders as turn people away from the right path. Through them disbelievers are being led to failure and grief and are also gradually losing whatever light of faith they possessed before the advent of the Holy Prophet. Their rejection of him has also led them to disown many truths which they acknowledged before. Add to this their deprivation of the light of the new faith and the darkness becomes complete. On the contrary, Islam is not only bringing new light to its adherents but is also bringing them success and happiness.
c
45:20.
d
5:17; 65:12.
e
7:28; 16:101.
اَلَمۡ تَرَ اِلَی الَّذِیۡ حَآجَّ اِبۡرٰہٖمَ فِیۡ رَبِّہٖۤ اَنۡ اٰتٰٮہُ اللّٰہُ الۡمُلۡکَ اِذۡ قَالَ اِبۡرٰہٖمُ رَبِّیَ الَّذِیۡ یُحۡیٖ وَیُمِیۡتُ قَالَ اَنَا۠ اُحۡیٖ وَاُمِیۡتُ ۖ قَالَ اِبۡرٰہٖمُ فَاِنَّ اللّٰہَ یَاۡتِیۡ بِالشَّمۡسِ مِنَ الۡمَشۡرِقِ فَاۡتِ بِہَا مِنَ الۡمَغۡرِبِ فَبُہِتَ الَّذِیۡ کَفَرَ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ لَا یَہۡدِی الۡقَوۡمَ الظّٰلِمِیۡنَ
3:157; 9:116; 40:69; 57:3.
اَنْ اٰ تَاہُ اللّٰہُ الْمُلْکَ میں ہ کی ضمیر کو ترجمہ میں بحث کرنے والے کی طرف پھیرا گیا ہے۔ لیکن جائز ہے کہ یہ ضمیر ابراہیمؑ کی طرف پھرتی ہو۔ اس صورت میں یہ معنے ہوں گے کہ وہ ابراہیم ؑ سے اس حسد کی وجہ سے بحث کرنے لگ گیا کہ ابراہیم ؑ کو کیوں اللہ نے روحانی بادشاہت عطا فرمائی ہے۔
حَآجَّہٗ: خَاصَمَہٗ (اقرب) اس سے بحث کرنے لگ گیا۔ اصل معنے حُجَّۃٌ کے اس دلیل کے ہیں جس سے انسان دوسرے پر غالب آجائے۔ لیکن باب مفاعلہ میں آکر اس کے معنے خالص بحث کرنے کے بھی ہو جاتے ہیں۔
مفسرین کہتے ہیں کہ حضرت ابراہیم علیہ السلام نے اپنی کمزوری دیکھ کر بحث کا پہلو بدلا۔ لیکن یہ بات درست نہیں۔ اصل بات یہ ہے کہ حضرت ابراہیم علیہ السلام کی قوم ستارہ پرست تھی اور وہ سمجھتے تھے کہ تمام مخلوق کی زندگی اور موت سورج کے ساتھ تعلق رکھتی ہے۔ جب مباحثین نے ضد اختیار کی تو حضرت ابراہیم علیہ السلام نے کہا کہ تیرے اختیار والی موت اور زندگی میری دلیل میں مرادنہ تھی‘ میری مراد یہ تھی کہ دنیا میں حیات و ممات کا جو سلسلہ جاری ہے یہ خدا کے اختیار میں ہے جس کے متعلق تیرا یہ عقیدہ ہے کہ وہ سورج کے اختیار میں ہے۔ پس اگر واقعہ میں تو وہی خدا ہے جس کے ہاتھ میں موت و حیات کا
3:157; 9:116; 40:69; 57:3.
Abraham was a great iconoclast. His people worshipped the sun and the stars, their chief god being Merodach (Madruk), originally the god of the morning and the spring sun (Enc. Bib. & Enc. Rel. Eth.ii.p.296). They believed that all life depended on the sun. Abraham very wisely asked the infidel that if he, as he claimed, controlled life and death, then let him reverse the course of the sun on which all life depended. He was in a fix. He could not say that he could not accept Abraham’s challenge to bring the sun from the West to the East, for that would have demolished his claim of being the controller of life and death, and if he had said that he could do so, it meant that he claimed to exercise control over the sun which would have been a great blasphemy in the eyes of his people who worshipped the sun. Thus he was completely confounded and did not know what to say.
3:157; 9:116; 40:69; 57:3.
Commentary:
The preceding verses spoke of the great rise and success in store for Muslims—their being brought out of darkness into light. Now the Quran proceeds to illustrate the promised rise and advancement. It takes us back to the days of Abraham.
An incident in the life of the great Patriarch has been cited to illustrate the truth of the statement made in the previous verse, viz. that God is the friend of believers; He helps them against their enemies and shows them the way of success, leading them out of darkness into light.
Abraham was a native of Ur of the Chaldees. His people worshipped the stars and their chief god was the Sun. Their greatest god was Merodach (or Madruk), who was originally the god of the morning and the spring sun. He was also called Bel, i.e. Lord (Enc. Bib. and Enc. Rel. Eth. ii. 296).
Abraham was hostile to the worship of idols and false deities and vehemently preached against them. He once set fire to a house which contained wooden images. On another occasion, be broke certain idols to pieces and burned them, whereupon he was produced before the king, whose name is recorded as Nimrod (Gen. 10:8, 9 and Jew. Enc. under Abraham) and who was also worshipped by the people as a representative of their deities. The king, it appears, threatened Abraham with ruin and death, to which Abraham firmly and boldly replied that he could do him no harm, for it was His Lord God Who granted life and caused death. As the king laid claim to godhead, he wrathfully rejoined that it was he who exercised these powers. Now Abraham knew that Nimrod and his people believed that all life depended on the sun, so if it was true that it was the king who controlled life and death, it meant that even the sun was under the control of the king and that the final power of life and death attributed by Nimrod and his men to the sun was a mere farce. So he pertinently asked the king to send back the sun from the west to the east (i.e. put it aside), for in such case the sun could not be recognized as the final controlling power. The king was in a fix. He could not say that he did not possess the power to send back the sun, for that would have exposed him. At the same time he could not say that it was he who caused the sun to rise from the east and set in the west, for his people looked upon the sun as the supreme deity, superior to the king himself, and if he had claimed any power over the sun, he would have surely roused the ire of his people against him. So he was dumbfounded and knew not what reply to make.
e
3:157; 9:116; 40:69; 57:3.
1
اَنْ اٰ تَاہُ اللّٰہُ الْمُلْکَ میں ہ کی ضمیر کو ترجمہ میں بحث کرنے والے کی طرف پھیرا گیا ہے۔ لیکن جائز ہے کہ یہ ضمیر ابراہیمؑ کی طرف پھرتی ہو۔ اس صورت میں یہ معنے ہوں گے کہ وہ ابراہیم ؑ سے اس حسد کی وجہ سے بحث کرنے لگ گیا کہ ابراہیم ؑ کو کیوں اللہ نے روحانی بادشاہت عطا فرمائی ہے۔
2
حَآجَّہٗ: خَاصَمَہٗ (اقرب) اس سے بحث کرنے لگ گیا۔ اصل معنے حُجَّۃٌ کے اس دلیل کے ہیں جس سے انسان دوسرے پر غالب آجائے۔ لیکن باب مفاعلہ میں آکر اس کے معنے خالص بحث کرنے کے بھی ہو جاتے ہیں۔
3
مفسرین کہتے ہیں کہ حضرت ابراہیم علیہ السلام نے اپنی کمزوری دیکھ کر بحث کا پہلو بدلا۔ لیکن یہ بات درست نہیں۔ اصل بات یہ ہے کہ حضرت ابراہیم علیہ السلام کی قوم ستارہ پرست تھی اور وہ سمجھتے تھے کہ تمام مخلوق کی زندگی اور موت سورج کے ساتھ تعلق رکھتی ہے۔ جب مباحثین نے ضد اختیار کی تو حضرت ابراہیم علیہ السلام نے کہا کہ تیرے اختیار والی موت اور زندگی میری دلیل میں مرادنہ تھی‘ میری مراد یہ تھی کہ دنیا میں حیات و ممات کا جو سلسلہ جاری ہے یہ خدا کے اختیار میں ہے جس کے متعلق تیرا یہ عقیدہ ہے کہ وہ سورج کے اختیار میں ہے۔ پس اگر واقعہ میں تو وہی خدا ہے جس کے ہاتھ میں موت و حیات کا
d
3:157; 9:116; 40:69; 57:3.
265
Commentary:
The preceding verses spoke of the great rise and success in store for Muslims—their being brought out of darkness into light. Now the Quran proceeds to illustrate the promised rise and advancement. It takes us back to the days of Abraham.
An incident in the life of the great Patriarch has been cited to illustrate the truth of the statement made in the previous verse, viz. that God is the friend of believers; He helps them against their enemies and shows them the way of success, leading them out of darkness into light.
Abraham was a native of Ur of the Chaldees. His people worshipped the stars and their chief god was the Sun. Their greatest god was Merodach (or Madruk), who was originally the god of the morning and the spring sun. He was also called Bel, i.e. Lord (Enc. Bib. and Enc. Rel. Eth. ii. 296).
Abraham was hostile to the worship of idols and false deities and vehemently preached against them. He once set fire to a house which contained wooden images. On another occasion, be broke certain idols to pieces and burned them, whereupon he was produced before the king, whose name is recorded as Nimrod (Gen. 10:8, 9 and Jew. Enc. under Abraham) and who was also worshipped by the people as a representative of their deities. The king, it appears, threatened Abraham with ruin and death, to which Abraham firmly and boldly replied that he could do him no harm, for it was His Lord God Who granted life and caused death. As the king laid claim to godhead, he wrathfully rejoined that it was he who exercised these powers. Now Abraham knew that Nimrod and his people believed that all life depended on the sun, so if it was true that it was the king who controlled life and death, it meant that even the sun was under the control of the king and that the final power of life and death attributed by Nimrod and his men to the sun was a mere farce. So he pertinently asked the king to send back the sun from the west to the east (i.e. put it aside), for in such case the sun could not be recognized as the final controlling power. The king was in a fix. He could not say that he did not possess the power to send back the sun, for that would have exposed him. At the same time he could not say that it was he who caused the sun to rise from the east and set in the west, for his people looked upon the sun as the supreme deity, superior to the king himself, and if he had claimed any power over the sun, he would have surely roused the ire of his people against him. So he was dumbfounded and knew not what reply to make.
a
3:157; 9:116; 40:69; 57:3.
321
Abraham was a great iconoclast. His people worshipped the sun and the stars, their chief god being Merodach (Madruk), originally the god of the morning and the spring sun (Enc. Bib. & Enc. Rel. Eth.ii.p.296). They believed that all life depended on the sun. Abraham very wisely asked the infidel that if he, as he claimed, controlled life and death, then let him reverse the course of the sun on which all life depended. He was in a fix. He could not say that he could not accept Abraham’s challenge to bring the sun from the West to the East, for that would have demolished his claim of being the controller of life and death, and if he had said that he could do so, it meant that he claimed to exercise control over the sun which would have been a great blasphemy in the eyes of his people who worshipped the sun. Thus he was completely confounded and did not know what to say.
اَوۡ کَالَّذِیۡ مَرَّ عَلٰی قَرۡیَۃٍ وَّہِیَ خَاوِیَۃٌ عَلٰی عُرُوۡشِہَا قَالَ اَنّٰی یُحۡیٖ ہٰذِہِ اللّٰہُ بَعۡدَ مَوۡتِہَا ۖ فَاَمَاتَہُ اللّٰہُ مِائَۃَ عَامٍ ثُمَّ بَعَثَہٗ ۖ قَالَ کَمۡ لَبِثۡتَ ۖ قَالَ لَبِثۡتُ یَوۡمًا اَوۡ بَعۡضَ یَوۡمٍ ۖ قَالَ بَل لَّبِثۡتَ مِائَۃَ عَامٍ فَانۡظُرۡ اِلٰی طَعَامِکَ وَشَرَابِکَ لَمۡ یَتَسَنَّہۡ ۖ وَانۡظُرۡ اِلٰی حِمَارِکَ وَلِنَجۡعَلَکَ اٰیَۃً لِّلنَّاسِ ۖ وَانۡظُرۡ اِلَی الۡعِظَامِ کَیۡفَ نُنۡشِزُہَا ثُمَّ نَکۡسُوۡہَا لَحۡمًا ۚ فَلَمَّا تَبَیَّنَ لَہٗ قَالَ اَعۡلَمُ اَنَّ اللّٰہَ عَلٰی کُلِّ شَیۡءٍ قَدِیۡرٌ
23:15.
یہاں آیت میں اَوْ کا لفظ استعمال ہوا ہے جس کے عام معنے تو ’’یا‘‘ کے ہیں۔ لیکن کبھی ’’اور‘‘ کے معنے بھی دیتا ہے۔
کَالَّذِیْ میں ک کا ترجمہ ہم نے حالت کا کیا ہے۔ لیکن عام طور پر اس کے معنے ’’طرح‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں۔ ان معنوں کومدِّنظر رکھ کر ترجمہ ہونا چاہیے تھا ’’اس شخص کی طرح‘‘ لیکن ہم نے ترجمہ کیا ہے ’’اس شخص کی مثل‘‘ اور یہ معنے بھی جائز ہیں۔ چنانچہ علامہ ابن ہشام لکھتے ہیں وَ اَمَّا الْکَافُ الْاِسْمِیَّۃُ الْجَارَّۃُ فَمُرَادِفَۃٌ لِّمِثْل یعنی ایک کاف اسمیّہ ہوتا ہے جو جرّ دیتا ہے اور اس کے معنے مثل یعنی مشابہ کے ہوتے ہیں (مُغْنی اللَّبِیب)
پہلے حضرت ابراہیم علیہ السلام کی ایک بحث کا ذکر کیا۔ پھر بعد کی آیات میں ایک مردہ شہر کا ذکر کیا۔ یہ اس بات کا ثبوت ہے کہ جو میں نے اوپر دلیل دی ہے وہی ٹھیک ہے یعنی حضرت ابراہیم علیہ السلام نے اپنے مخالف سے حیات فردی کا ذکر نہیں کیا تھا بلکہ حیات قومی یا جنسی کا ذکر کیا تھا۔ کیونکہ یہ مثال جو اب بیان کی گئی ہے اس میں حیات قومی یا جنسی کا ذکر ہے۔ حیات فردی کا ذکر نہیں۔
خَاوِیَۃٌ: خَوٰی یَخْوِیْ خَوَائٌ سے نکلا ہے کہتے ہیں خَوَی الْبَیْتُ: سَقَطَ وَ تَھَدَّمَ گھر کر گیا۔ نیز فَرَغَ وَ خَلَا گھر خالی ہو گیا۔ ویران ہو گیا (اقرب) پس جملہ کے یہ معنے ہوئے کہ وہ شہر اپنی چھتوں پر گرا ہوا تھا یعنی پہلے چھتیں گریں پھر ان پر دیواریں گر گئیں۔ بعض نے ’’خالی ہو گیا‘‘ کے معنے کرکے عَلٰی عُرُوْشِھَا سے پہلے ایک اور ساقط محذوف نکالا ہے یعنی شہر خالی تھا اور اپنی چھتوں پر گرا ہوا تھا۔ دونوں معنے درست ہیں لمبی ویرانی پر دلالت کرنے کے لئے یہ الفاظ استعمال ہوئے ہیں کیونکہ جو مکان عدم استعمال کی وجہ سے گریں بالعموم پہلے ان
بَلْ حرف ہے جو اِضْرَاب کے معنے دیتا ہے یعنی بات کو پھیر کر دوسری طرف لے جانا۔ یہ اِضْرَاب دو طرح کا ہوتا ہے ایک تو انکار کی غرض سے ہوتا ہے جیسے قرآن کریم میں ہے۔ وَ قَالُوا اتَّخَذَ الرَّحْمٰنُ وَلَدًا سُبْحَانَہٗ بَلْ عِبَادٌ مُّکْرَمُوْنَ (انبیاء: ۲۷) یعنی پہلی بات غلط ہے۔ حقیقت یہ ہے کہ جن کو خدا کا بیٹا کہتے ہیں وہ اللہ کے معزز بندے ہیں اور دوسری اقسام اضراب کی یہ ہے کہ ایک غرض سے دوسری غرض کی طرف مضمون کو پھیرنا مقصود ہوتا ہے۔ بَل سے پہلے جملہ کی تردید مدنظر نہیں ہوتی۔ جیسے قران کریم میں ہے قَدْ اَفْلَح مَنْ تَزَکّٰی وَ ذَکَرَ اسْمَ رَبِ
قَرْیَۃ سے مراد یوروشلم ہے جسے بخت نصر نے تباہ کر دیا تھا۔ وہ آدمی جو یوروشلم کے پاس سے گذرا حزقیل نبی تھا۔ اللہ تعالیٰ نے کشف کے ذریعہ سے ان پر ظاہر کیا کہ ایک سو سال تک یہ شہر دوبارہ آباد ہو جائے گا۔ (حزقیل کے کشف کے لئے دیکھیں پرانا عہدنامہ حزقیل باب۳۷)
23:15.
The ruined town referred to in the verse is Jerusalem which was laid waste by Nebuchadnezzar, the King of Babylon in 599 B.C. Ezekiel, the Prophet, was among the Jews whom Nebuchadnezzar carried away into captivity to Babylon and who was made to pass by, and witness the ghastly sight of, the devastated town.
Ezekiel was naturally shocked at the sad sight and prayed to God in words full of extreme pathos as to when the ruined town would be restored to life. His prayer was heard and he was made to see a vision that the restoration prayed for would take place in a hundred years. The verse does not mean that Ezekiel remained actually dead for a hundred years. Only he saw a vision that he had died and had remained dead for a hundred years and then had come back to life. The Qur’an sometimes mentions scenes seen in a vision as having actually taken place without stating that they were witnessed in a vision or dream (12:5). The vision signified, and Ezekiel understood the significance, that the Children of Israel would remain in the state of captivity and complete national degradation for about a hundred years after which they would receive a new life and would come back to their sacred city. And it actually came to pass as Ezekiel had dreamt. Jerusalem was taken by Nebuchadnezzar in 599 B.C. (2 Kings 24: 10). Ezek
The words are intended to express indefiniteness of time (18:20 & 23:114) and mean, according to the Quranic usage, that Ezekiel did not know how long he had remained in that state. Yaum here does not mean a day of 24 hours but time absolutely (see 1:4). The words, I have remained a day or part of a day, may also refer to the time for which Ezekiel slept or the time he took in seeing the vision. Apparently Ezekiel thought that he was being asked about the duration of the time of the vision.
Bal is a particle of digression signifying (a) the cancellation of what precedes as in 21:27, or (b) transition from one object of discourse to another as in 87:17. Here bal has been used in the latter sense.
The clause, It is so but thou hast also remained in this state for a hundred years, points out that although in one sense Ezekiel had remained in that state for a hundred years (for he had dreamt that he had been dead for a hundred years), yet the statement that he had tarried for a day or part of a day was also correct, for the actual time spent in seeing the vision was naturally very short.
To bring home this fact to the mind of Ezekiel, God directed his attention to his food and drink and his ass. That his food and drink had not rotted and his ass was still alive showed that he had really tarried only for a day or part of it. The words, look at thy ass, also indicate that Ezekiel saw the vision while sleeping in the fields with his ass by his side, for while in captivity, the Israelites were made to work in the fields as farmers.
Ezekiel represented in his person the whole Jewish nation. His symbolic death for a hundred years represented their national degradation and sorrows in captivity, for that was the period after which they came to their own. This is how Ezekiel became a Sign. See also Ezekiel, chap. 37.
23:15.
Important Word:
خاویة (fallen) is derived from خوی. They say خوی البیت i.e. (1) the house fell down in ruins; (2) the house became empty and untenanted (Aqrab).
عروش (roofs) is the plural of عرش (roof). They say عرش i.e. he built a house. عرش البیت means, he raised the roof of the house. عرش means: (1) the roof of a house; (2) the throne or the ceremonious chair of a king; (3) the pillar, etc. supporting a thing; (4) honour and prowess; (5) leaders and chiefs among men; (6) tent, canopy, shed etc. affordingshade; (7) trellis supporting vines (Aqrab & Lane).
یتسنه (have rotted) is derived from سنه i.e. (1) it passed through a time extending over years; (2) it (food, etc.) became altered and rotten by the lapse of years or absolutely. تسنه gives the same meaning as سنه (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The preceding verse contained one illustration of how Allah brings His friends out of darkness into light. The present verse cites, as hinted in the words, or like him, another illustration of how He breathes new life into a people after they have fallen and become degraded.
The ruined town referred to in the verse is Jerusalem which was laid waste by Nebuchadnezzar. The person who, as the verse says, passed by it was Ezekiel, the Prophet; and the words which had fallen down upon its roofs hint that it was soon after its destruction by Nebuchadnezzar that Ezekiel passed by the town. Ezekiel was among the Israelite captives whom Nebuchadnezzar carried away to Babylon and who, in accordance with an ancient custom, were made to pass by the ruins of the town so that they might witness with their own eyes how their city had been laid in ruins by the conqueror. Ezekiel, who was a great well-wisher of his people, was immensely pained to see the ruins of the sacred city and pathetically asked God when the time would come when the ruined city would be restored to life, i.e. when its inhabitants, the children of Israel, would come back to it, rebuild it and make it prosperous once more. This prayer, it appears, was heard by God Who showed him in a vision that the restoration asked for would come in a hundred years.
The clause then Allah caused him to die for a hundred years does not mean that Ezekiel was actually made to die and then raised to life again. It was, in fact, a vision which Ezekiel saw (Ezek. 37). The Quran sometimes mentions scenes seen in a vision as if they had actually happened, without stating that they were witnessed in a vision or a dream (e.g. 12:5). What actually happened was that Ezekiel saw in a vision that he had died and remained dead for a hundred years and then had come back to life. As he was the representative of his people, his death signified the death of the Israelites. Thus God informed him through this vision that the children of Israel would remain in their state of captivity and lifelessness for a hundred years, after which a new life would be given them and they would return to inhabit their sacred city. And this dream or vision actually turned out to be true. For Jerusalem was first invaded by Nebuchadnezzar in 597 B.C. and again in 587 B.C., when after a long siege the city was totally destroyed by his general in 586 B.C. Ezekiel probably saw the vision in 586 B.C. The city was rebuilt about 100 years after its destruction and thus the vision came true.
It is wrong to think that God actually caused Ezekiel to die and that he remained dead for a hundred years and was then brought back to life; for that would have been no answer to his prayer, which did not pertain to the death and resurrection of any individual but to that of a town which was lying in ruins.
The words, which had fallen down upon its roofs; point out that Ezekiel saw the ruins soon after the destruction (not necessarily the complete and final destruction) of the town when the fallen roofs were still to be seen under the debris of the walls.
The words, I have remained a day or part of a day, are intended to express indefiniteness of time and mean, according to the Quranic usage, that Ezekiel did not know how long he had remained in that state. The words have been used in this sense in another passage of the Quran as well: They said, We have tarried a day or part of a day. Others said, Your Lord knows best the time you have tarried (18:20). Again, They will say, We tarried a day or part of a day, but ask those who keep count (23:114). In fact, یوم (day) here does not mean a day of 24 or 12 hours but time absolutely (see 1:4). The clause, I have remained a day or part of a day, may also refer to the time for which Ezekiel slept or the time he took in seeing the vision or the dream. Apparently Ezekiel thought that he was being asked about the duration of the time of the vision.
The clause, Nay, thou hast remained in this state for a hundred years, points out that although in one sense he had remained in that state for a hundred years (for he had dreamt that he had been dead for a hundred years), yet the statement that he had tarried for a day or part of a day, was also correct, for the time spent in seeing the vision was naturally very short. To bring home this fact to the mind of Ezekiel, God directed his attention to his food and drink and to the ass. That his food and drink had not become stale and that his ass was still alive, showed that he had really tarried only for a short time. The words and look at thy ass also indicate that Ezekiel saw the vision while sleeping in his fields with his ass by his side, for while in captivity the Israelites were made to work in the fields as farmers.
The words that We may make thee a Sign unto men show that Ezekiel was to be made a Sign to men inasmuch as his vision, according to which Jerusalem was to become re-inhabited by the children of Israel, was to come true. The words, look at the bones, are intended to echo the words used by the children of Israel in those days of misery, viz. that they had become like dry bones and there was no hope of their being ever endued with new life (Ezek. 37:11, 12). The words along with the accompanying clause meant that God had power to clothe the bones with flesh and to breathe new life into them. The bones were first to be set or placed in position and thereafter clothed with flesh, i.e. the Israelites, then like dead bones, were first to be brought back to their town and then the process of the clothing of the bones with flesh, i.e. the rebuilding of the town, etc. was to be completed.
The vision of Ezekiel has been mentioned in the Bible in chapter 37 of his book.
a
23:15.
1
یہاں آیت میں اَوْ کا لفظ استعمال ہوا ہے جس کے عام معنے تو ’’یا‘‘ کے ہیں۔ لیکن کبھی ’’اور‘‘ کے معنے بھی دیتا ہے۔
2
کَالَّذِیْ میں ک کا ترجمہ ہم نے حالت کا کیا ہے۔ لیکن عام طور پر اس کے معنے ’’طرح‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں۔ ان معنوں کومدِّنظر رکھ کر ترجمہ ہونا چاہیے تھا ’’اس شخص کی طرح‘‘ لیکن ہم نے ترجمہ کیا ہے ’’اس شخص کی مثل‘‘ اور یہ معنے بھی جائز ہیں۔ چنانچہ علامہ ابن ہشام لکھتے ہیں وَ اَمَّا الْکَافُ الْاِسْمِیَّۃُ الْجَارَّۃُ فَمُرَادِفَۃٌ لِّمِثْل یعنی ایک کاف اسمیّہ ہوتا ہے جو جرّ دیتا ہے اور اس کے معنے مثل یعنی مشابہ کے ہوتے ہیں (مُغْنی اللَّبِیب)
3
پہلے حضرت ابراہیم علیہ السلام کی ایک بحث کا ذکر کیا۔ پھر بعد کی آیات میں ایک مردہ شہر کا ذکر کیا۔ یہ اس بات کا ثبوت ہے کہ جو میں نے اوپر دلیل دی ہے وہی ٹھیک ہے یعنی حضرت ابراہیم علیہ السلام نے اپنے مخالف سے حیات فردی کا ذکر نہیں کیا تھا بلکہ حیات قومی یا جنسی کا ذکر کیا تھا۔ کیونکہ یہ مثال جو اب بیان کی گئی ہے اس میں حیات قومی یا جنسی کا ذکر ہے۔ حیات فردی کا ذکر نہیں۔
4
خَاوِیَۃٌ: خَوٰی یَخْوِیْ خَوَائٌ سے نکلا ہے کہتے ہیں خَوَی الْبَیْتُ: سَقَطَ وَ تَھَدَّمَ گھر کر گیا۔ نیز فَرَغَ وَ خَلَا گھر خالی ہو گیا۔ ویران ہو گیا (اقرب) پس جملہ کے یہ معنے ہوئے کہ وہ شہر اپنی چھتوں پر گرا ہوا تھا یعنی پہلے چھتیں گریں پھر ان پر دیواریں گر گئیں۔ بعض نے ’’خالی ہو گیا‘‘ کے معنے کرکے عَلٰی عُرُوْشِھَا سے پہلے ایک اور ساقط محذوف نکالا ہے یعنی شہر خالی تھا اور اپنی چھتوں پر گرا ہوا تھا۔ دونوں معنے درست ہیں لمبی ویرانی پر دلالت کرنے کے لئے یہ الفاظ استعمال ہوئے ہیں کیونکہ جو مکان عدم استعمال کی وجہ سے گریں بالعموم پہلے ان
5
بَلْ حرف ہے جو اِضْرَاب کے معنے دیتا ہے یعنی بات کو پھیر کر دوسری طرف لے جانا۔ یہ اِضْرَاب دو طرح کا ہوتا ہے ایک تو انکار کی غرض سے ہوتا ہے جیسے قرآن کریم میں ہے۔ وَ قَالُوا اتَّخَذَ الرَّحْمٰنُ وَلَدًا سُبْحَانَہٗ بَلْ عِبَادٌ مُّکْرَمُوْنَ (انبیاء: ۲۷) یعنی پہلی بات غلط ہے۔ حقیقت یہ ہے کہ جن کو خدا کا بیٹا کہتے ہیں وہ اللہ کے معزز بندے ہیں اور دوسری اقسام اضراب کی یہ ہے کہ ایک غرض سے دوسری غرض کی طرف مضمون کو پھیرنا مقصود ہوتا ہے۔ بَل سے پہلے جملہ کی تردید مدنظر نہیں ہوتی۔ جیسے قران کریم میں ہے قَدْ اَفْلَح مَنْ تَزَکّٰی وَ ذَکَرَ اسْمَ رَبِ
6
قَرْیَۃ سے مراد یوروشلم ہے جسے بخت نصر نے تباہ کر دیا تھا۔ وہ آدمی جو یوروشلم کے پاس سے گذرا حزقیل نبی تھا۔ اللہ تعالیٰ نے کشف کے ذریعہ سے ان پر ظاہر کیا کہ ایک سو سال تک یہ شہر دوبارہ آباد ہو جائے گا۔ (حزقیل کے کشف کے لئے دیکھیں پرانا عہدنامہ حزقیل باب۳۷)
a
23:15.
266
Important Word:
خاویة (fallen) is derived from خوی. They say خوی البیت i.e. (1) the house fell down in ruins; (2) the house became empty and untenanted (Aqrab).
عروش (roofs) is the plural of عرش (roof). They say عرش i.e. he built a house. عرش البیت means, he raised the roof of the house. عرش means: (1) the roof of a house; (2) the throne or the ceremonious chair of a king; (3) the pillar, etc. supporting a thing; (4) honour and prowess; (5) leaders and chiefs among men; (6) tent, canopy, shed etc. affordingshade; (7) trellis supporting vines (Aqrab & Lane).
یتسنه (have rotted) is derived from سنه i.e. (1) it passed through a time extending over years; (2) it (food, etc.) became altered and rotten by the lapse of years or absolutely. تسنه gives the same meaning as سنه (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The preceding verse contained one illustration of how Allah brings His friends out of darkness into light. The present verse cites, as hinted in the words, or like him, another illustration of how He breathes new life into a people after they have fallen and become degraded.
The ruined town referred to in the verse is Jerusalem which was laid waste by Nebuchadnezzar. The person who, as the verse says, passed by it was Ezekiel, the Prophet; and the words which had fallen down upon its roofs hint that it was soon after its destruction by Nebuchadnezzar that Ezekiel passed by the town. Ezekiel was among the Israelite captives whom Nebuchadnezzar carried away to Babylon and who, in accordance with an ancient custom, were made to pass by the ruins of the town so that they might witness with their own eyes how their city had been laid in ruins by the conqueror. Ezekiel, who was a great well-wisher of his people, was immensely pained to see the ruins of the sacred city and pathetically asked God when the time would come when the ruined city would be restored to life, i.e. when its inhabitants, the children of Israel, would come back to it, rebuild it and make it prosperous once more. This prayer, it appears, was heard by God Who showed him in a vision that the restoration asked for would come in a hundred years.
The clause then Allah caused him to die for a hundred years does not mean that Ezekiel was actually made to die and then raised to life again. It was, in fact, a vision which Ezekiel saw (Ezek. 37). The Quran sometimes mentions scenes seen in a vision as if they had actually happened, without stating that they were witnessed in a vision or a dream (e.g. 12:5). What actually happened was that Ezekiel saw in a vision that he had died and remained dead for a hundred years and then had come back to life. As he was the representative of his people, his death signified the death of the Israelites. Thus God informed him through this vision that the children of Israel would remain in their state of captivity and lifelessness for a hundred years, after which a new life would be given them and they would return to inhabit their sacred city. And this dream or vision actually turned out to be true. For Jerusalem was first invaded by Nebuchadnezzar in 597 B.C. and again in 587 B.C., when after a long siege the city was totally destroyed by his general in 586 B.C. Ezekiel probably saw the vision in 586 B.C. The city was rebuilt about 100 years after its destruction and thus the vision came true.
It is wrong to think that God actually caused Ezekiel to die and that he remained dead for a hundred years and was then brought back to life; for that would have been no answer to his prayer, which did not pertain to the death and resurrection of any individual but to that of a town which was lying in ruins.
The words, which had fallen down upon its roofs; point out that Ezekiel saw the ruins soon after the destruction (not necessarily the complete and final destruction) of the town when the fallen roofs were still to be seen under the debris of the walls.
The words, I have remained a day or part of a day, are intended to express indefiniteness of time and mean, according to the Quranic usage, that Ezekiel did not know how long he had remained in that state. The words have been used in this sense in another passage of the Quran as well: They said, We have tarried a day or part of a day. Others said, Your Lord knows best the time you have tarried (18:20). Again, They will say, We tarried a day or part of a day, but ask those who keep count (23:114). In fact, یوم (day) here does not mean a day of 24 or 12 hours but time absolutely (see 1:4). The clause, I have remained a day or part of a day, may also refer to the time for which Ezekiel slept or the time he took in seeing the vision or the dream. Apparently Ezekiel thought that he was being asked about the duration of the time of the vision.
The clause, Nay, thou hast remained in this state for a hundred years, points out that although in one sense he had remained in that state for a hundred years (for he had dreamt that he had been dead for a hundred years), yet the statement that he had tarried for a day or part of a day, was also correct, for the time spent in seeing the vision was naturally very short. To bring home this fact to the mind of Ezekiel, God directed his attention to his food and drink and to the ass. That his food and drink had not become stale and that his ass was still alive, showed that he had really tarried only for a short time. The words and look at thy ass also indicate that Ezekiel saw the vision while sleeping in his fields with his ass by his side, for while in captivity the Israelites were made to work in the fields as farmers.
The words that We may make thee a Sign unto men show that Ezekiel was to be made a Sign to men inasmuch as his vision, according to which Jerusalem was to become re-inhabited by the children of Israel, was to come true. The words, look at the bones, are intended to echo the words used by the children of Israel in those days of misery, viz. that they had become like dry bones and there was no hope of their being ever endued with new life (Ezek. 37:11, 12). The words along with the accompanying clause meant that God had power to clothe the bones with flesh and to breathe new life into them. The bones were first to be set or placed in position and thereafter clothed with flesh, i.e. the Israelites, then like dead bones, were first to be brought back to their town and then the process of the clothing of the bones with flesh, i.e. the rebuilding of the town, etc. was to be completed.
The vision of Ezekiel has been mentioned in the Bible in chapter 37 of his book.
a
23:15.
322
The ruined town referred to in the verse is Jerusalem which was laid waste by Nebuchadnezzar, the King of Babylon in 599 B.C. Ezekiel, the Prophet, was among the Jews whom Nebuchadnezzar carried away into captivity to Babylon and who was made to pass by, and witness the ghastly sight of, the devastated town.
323
Ezekiel was naturally shocked at the sad sight and prayed to God in words full of extreme pathos as to when the ruined town would be restored to life. His prayer was heard and he was made to see a vision that the restoration prayed for would take place in a hundred years. The verse does not mean that Ezekiel remained actually dead for a hundred years. Only he saw a vision that he had died and had remained dead for a hundred years and then had come back to life. The Qur’an sometimes mentions scenes seen in a vision as having actually taken place without stating that they were witnessed in a vision or dream (12:5). The vision signified, and Ezekiel understood the significance, that the Children of Israel would remain in the state of captivity and complete national degradation for about a hundred years after which they would receive a new life and would come back to their sacred city. And it actually came to pass as Ezekiel had dreamt. Jerusalem was taken by Nebuchadnezzar in 599 B.C. (2 Kings 24: 10). Ezek
323A
The words are intended to express indefiniteness of time (18:20 & 23:114) and mean, according to the Quranic usage, that Ezekiel did not know how long he had remained in that state. Yaum here does not mean a day of 24 hours but time absolutely (see 1:4). The words, I have remained a day or part of a day, may also refer to the time for which Ezekiel slept or the time he took in seeing the vision. Apparently Ezekiel thought that he was being asked about the duration of the time of the vision.
323B
Bal is a particle of digression signifying (a) the cancellation of what precedes as in 21:27, or (b) transition from one object of discourse to another as in 87:17. Here bal has been used in the latter sense.
324
The clause, It is so but thou hast also remained in this state for a hundred years, points out that although in one sense Ezekiel had remained in that state for a hundred years (for he had dreamt that he had been dead for a hundred years), yet the statement that he had tarried for a day or part of a day was also correct, for the actual time spent in seeing the vision was naturally very short.
325
To bring home this fact to the mind of Ezekiel, God directed his attention to his food and drink and his ass. That his food and drink had not rotted and his ass was still alive showed that he had really tarried only for a day or part of it. The words, look at thy ass, also indicate that Ezekiel saw the vision while sleeping in the fields with his ass by his side, for while in captivity, the Israelites were made to work in the fields as farmers.
326
Ezekiel represented in his person the whole Jewish nation. His symbolic death for a hundred years represented their national degradation and sorrows in captivity, for that was the period after which they came to their own. This is how Ezekiel became a Sign. See also Ezekiel, chap. 37.
اَلَّذِیۡنَ یَاۡکُلُوۡنَ الرِّبٰوا لَا یَقُوۡمُوۡنَ اِلَّا کَمَا یَقُوۡمُ الَّذِیۡ یَتَخَبَّطُہُ الشَّیۡطٰنُ مِنَ الۡمَسِّ ۚ ذٰلِکَ بِاَنَّہُمۡ قَالُوۡۤا اِنَّمَا الۡبَیۡعُ مِثۡلُ الرِّبٰوا ۗ وَاَحَلَّ اللّٰہُ الۡبَیۡعَ وَحَرَّمَ الرِّبٰوا ۚ فَمَنۡ جَآءَہٗ مَوۡعِظَۃٌ مِّنۡ رَّبِّہٖ فَانۡتَہٰی فَلَہٗ مَا سَلَفَ وَاَمۡرُہٗۤ اِلَی اللّٰہِ ۖ وَمَنۡ عَادَ فَاُولٰٓئِکَ اَصۡحٰبُ النَّارِ ۖ ہُمۡ فِیۡہَا خٰلِدُوۡنَ
3:131; 30:40.
رِبٰوا (Riba) 的词义是:超额量或额外事物, 意指本金以上的金额 (Lane)。它包括高
利贷和利息。根据圣训, 这一定义是 “为收取利息所提供的每项贷款”。رِبٰوا 的涵义并不像一般理解的那样与 “利息” 完全相同。可是由於缺少一个较好的词, 就用 “利息” 作为粗略的等同语。实际上,一个人提供或接受一项贷款之上所规定要得到或给予的任何数目的钱都叫 “利息”, 不论这笔交易是同个人、银行、团体或邮政局或其他组织做的。“利息” 并不限于钱的范围内, 它可延伸到作为一项贷款的任何商品, 只要事先同意的一项超额量就是。
这些词意指, 正如一个疯子不顾他的行动后果那样, 放债者残忍地从不顾及他们对个人、社会甚至整个世界所作出的道德上和经济上的损害。利息也使放债者产生一种精神缺陷, 就是他一心钻在赚钱里面而对所有美好事业却麻木不仁。伊斯兰教禁止利息, 因为它会使财富集中到一小撮人手里而由此不利於财富的均衡分配。它促使放债者游手好闲, 使他丧失帮助别人的一切善心, 堵塞他对别人同情行为的所有泉源。放债者利用别人的穷困、急需而赚钱。而在另一方面, 利息使放债者利用别人急需的东西, 造成借债者一种粗心和匆忙行事的倾向, 不考虑自己还债的能力而背了债。这样, 对自己和放债者都造成道德上不可弥补的损害。利息也会引起战争。没有贷款的帮助, 战争是持续不了的。这种贷款的利息最终使战胜和战败者双方的经济都遭受毁灭。这种轻而易得的贷款制度, 使各国政府不断进行毁灭性的斗争, 因为他们能够不采用直接征税的方法而取得军费。伊斯兰教禁止各种利息。但在现代商业或事务中, 利息已成为不可分割的部分, 以致看来几乎不可能完全把它去掉。不过如果在制度、环境和情况方面发生变化的话, 像伊斯兰教过去在上升时代一样没有利息商业还是可以维持的。
最后, 可以注意的是, 鉴于现代的特殊条件, 我们周围存在着一种邪恶的利息制度网络而伊斯兰教的状况又十分衰落, 阿哈默底亚会的创始人宣称, 如果一个人被迫接受利息, 他可以这样做, 然后把这样得到的钱消费在 (a) 传播伊斯兰教, 以及 (b) 他可以同样被迫要付的钱来偿清任何利息。然而他应该严格认真地避免把这样的钱化在自己身上或家庭方面, 或利用于其他各种用途 (Al-Fadl, Fatawa)。
تَخَبَّطَہُ الشَّیْطٰنُ: مَسَّہٗ بِاَذًی شیطان نے اسے تکلیف پہنچائی (اقرب) اسی طرح کہتے ہیں تَخَبَّطَہٗ: ضَرَبَہٗ شَدِیْدًا اسے سخت مارا (اقرب) اور اَلْمَسُّ: اَلْجُنُوْنُ (اقرب) مَسّ کے معنے جنون کے ہیں۔ مِنْ بیانیہ ہے پس معنے یہ ہوئے کہ جس پر شیطان یعنی جنون نے سخت حملہ کیا ہو۔
3:131; 30:40.
Riba literally meaning, an excess or addition, signifies an addition over and above the principal sum (Lane). It covers both usury and interest. According to the Hadith "every loan advanced to draw profits" comes under this definition. The connotation of Riba is not strictly identical with "interest," as commonly understood. But for lack of a better word "interest" may be used as a rough equivalent. In fact, any sum stipulated to be received or given over and above what one advances or receives as a loan is "interest," whether the dealing is with an individual or a bank or a society or a post office or any other organisation. "Interest" is not confined to money. It extends to any commodity which is given as a loan with the condition that it will be returned with an agreed excess.
The words signify that just as a mad man is heedless of the consequences of his actions, so are the moneylenders heartlessly oblivious of the moral and economic injury they do to individuals, the society and even the world at large. Riba also causes a touch of insanity in the moneylender in the sense that his entire engrossment in profit-making renders him insensible to all good causes. Riba is prohibited in Islam because it tends to draw wealth into the hands of a small circle and thereby adversely affects its equitable distribution. It promotes idleness in the moneylenders and kills in them all incentive to help others and chokes all springs of sympathetic behaviour. The moneylender takes advantage of, and makes profit from, the need and distress of others. While on the one hand Riba causes the lender to exploit other people’s wants, it creates in the debtor a tendency to do things carelessly and in haste, incurring debt regardless of his capacity to pay back, thus doing irreparabl
3:131; 30:40.
Important Words:
ربوا (interest) is derived from ربا. They say رباالمال i.e. the money or property increased and became augmented. ربواmeans, an excess and an addition; an addition over and above the principal sum; interest. The hadith defines ربوا as کل قرض جرمنفعة فھوربا i.e. every loan advanced to draw profit comes under the definition of interest (Saghir).
یتخبطه (has smitten) is derived from خبطه i.e. he struck or beat him violently; he trod him under his feet vehemently. خبط اللیل means, he walked about in the darkness of the night without finding the true way. تخبطه means, he struck or beat him violently. تخبطه الشیطان means, Satan struck him and afflicted him with hurt or injury; Satan prostrated him (Aqrab).
المس (insanity) is derived from مس. They say مسه i.e. he touched it; or he touched it with his hand. من المرض اوالکبر فلانا means, disease or old age touched him, i.e. came on him. مسه الشیطان بنصب وعذاب means, Satan brought pain and trouble on him. المسmeans, any pain or trouble, etc. that comes to a man by coming in contact with someone or something; it also signifies madness or insanity (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The prohibition against lending money on interest is preceded by a long exhortation to exercise charity. When a person becomes accustomed to spending his wealth in charity and alms, it becomes easier for him to lend money free of interest.
The Quran prohibits all kinds of interest. In modern times, however, business has become so inseparably mixed up with interest that it appears impossible to avoid interest altogether. But if a change of system as well as of surroundings and circumstances were brought about, business without interest would establish itself in the world as was the case in the days when Islam was in ascendancy.
The clause, those who devour interest do not rise except as rises one whom Satan has smitten with insanity, means that just as a madman does not see the consequences of his actions, similarly those who lend money at interest become careless of consequences. They keep in view only their own immediate interests and do not care, and in fact generally become incapable of caring, for the great harm which they do to society and the world at large. Interest also encourages a person or a government to incur debt beyond his or its capacity and in this way also blinds them to consequences. Another way in which interest causes a touch of insanity is to weaken the sense of goodness and beneficence in man by making him over-engrossed in money-making. Interest also leads to war. Money-lenders are always creating circumstances which may cause conflict between one nation and another so that war may break out and the belligerent nations may be compelled to borrow money from them. Interest also helps to prolong war by encouraging belligerent nations to borrow money beyond their capacity. Again, interest helps the accumulation of wealth in a few hands and thereby most injuriously affects the distribution of wealth and the balance of society. Yet another manifestation of madness caused by interest is that those who pay interest have their sense of dignity lowered and they contract the habit of carelessness and hastiness, thus acquiring a resemblance to one stricken by madness. See also 2:280 below.
The words, trade also is like interest, represent the pet argument of the supporters of interest. They say interest is nothing but a form of trade. Just as in trade one invests money with a view to increasing and multiplying it, so does one in lending money at interest. But deeper thinking would reveal that there is a world of difference between the two. While interest is attended by all the evil consequences briefly referred to above, trade is not.
The words, then will that which he received in the past be his, mean that if one accepts guidance from God and desists from charging interest in future, the past will be forgiven him and God will make good the loss he may thus suffer by other means.
It should be remembered that any sum stipulated to be received or given over and above what one advances or receives as a loan is interest, whether the dealing is with an individual or a bank or a society or a post office or any other organisation. Interest is not confined to money. It extends to any commodity which is given as a loan with the condition that it will be returned with an agreed excess.
Finally, it may be noted that in view of the peculiar conditions of the present times, when there is a vicious network of the interest system surrounding us and Islam is in a greatly weakened condition, the Holy Founder of the Ahmadiyya Movement has declared that if a person is forced to accept interest, he may do so and then spend the money thus received on (a) the propagation of Islam, and (b) paying off any interest that he may similarly be forced to pay. He should, however, scrupulously avoid spending such money on himself or his family or using it in any other way (Fatawa & Al-Fadl).
f
3:131; 30:40.
206
رِبٰوا (Riba) 的词义是:超额量或额外事物, 意指本金以上的金额 (Lane)。它包括高
利贷和利息。根据圣训, 这一定义是 “为收取利息所提供的每项贷款”。رِبٰوا 的涵义并不像一般理解的那样与 “利息” 完全相同。可是由於缺少一个较好的词, 就用 “利息” 作为粗略的等同语。实际上,一个人提供或接受一项贷款之上所规定要得到或给予的任何数目的钱都叫 “利息”, 不论这笔交易是同个人、银行、团体或邮政局或其他组织做的。“利息” 并不限于钱的范围内, 它可延伸到作为一项贷款的任何商品, 只要事先同意的一项超额量就是。
207
这些词意指, 正如一个疯子不顾他的行动后果那样, 放债者残忍地从不顾及他们对个人、社会甚至整个世界所作出的道德上和经济上的损害。利息也使放债者产生一种精神缺陷, 就是他一心钻在赚钱里面而对所有美好事业却麻木不仁。伊斯兰教禁止利息, 因为它会使财富集中到一小撮人手里而由此不利於财富的均衡分配。它促使放债者游手好闲, 使他丧失帮助别人的一切善心, 堵塞他对别人同情行为的所有泉源。放债者利用别人的穷困、急需而赚钱。而在另一方面, 利息使放债者利用别人急需的东西, 造成借债者一种粗心和匆忙行事的倾向, 不考虑自己还债的能力而背了债。这样, 对自己和放债者都造成道德上不可弥补的损害。利息也会引起战争。没有贷款的帮助, 战争是持续不了的。这种贷款的利息最终使战胜和战败者双方的经济都遭受毁灭。这种轻而易得的贷款制度, 使各国政府不断进行毁灭性的斗争, 因为他们能够不采用直接征税的方法而取得军费。伊斯兰教禁止各种利息。但在现代商业或事务中, 利息已成为不可分割的部分, 以致看来几乎不可能完全把它去掉。不过如果在制度、环境和情况方面发生变化的话, 像伊斯兰教过去在上升时代一样没有利息商业还是可以维持的。
最后, 可以注意的是, 鉴于现代的特殊条件, 我们周围存在着一种邪恶的利息制度网络而伊斯兰教的状况又十分衰落, 阿哈默底亚会的创始人宣称, 如果一个人被迫接受利息, 他可以这样做, 然后把这样得到的钱消费在 (a) 传播伊斯兰教, 以及 (b) 他可以同样被迫要付的钱来偿清任何利息。然而他应该严格认真地避免把这样的钱化在自己身上或家庭方面, 或利用于其他各种用途 (Al-Fadl, Fatawa)。
1
تَخَبَّطَہُ الشَّیْطٰنُ: مَسَّہٗ بِاَذًی شیطان نے اسے تکلیف پہنچائی (اقرب) اسی طرح کہتے ہیں تَخَبَّطَہٗ: ضَرَبَہٗ شَدِیْدًا اسے سخت مارا (اقرب) اور اَلْمَسُّ: اَلْجُنُوْنُ (اقرب) مَسّ کے معنے جنون کے ہیں۔ مِنْ بیانیہ ہے پس معنے یہ ہوئے کہ جس پر شیطان یعنی جنون نے سخت حملہ کیا ہو۔
a
3:131; 30:40.
282
Important Words:
ربوا (interest) is derived from ربا. They say رباالمال i.e. the money or property increased and became augmented. ربواmeans, an excess and an addition; an addition over and above the principal sum; interest. The hadith defines ربوا as کل قرض جرمنفعة فھوربا i.e. every loan advanced to draw profit comes under the definition of interest (Saghir).
یتخبطه (has smitten) is derived from خبطه i.e. he struck or beat him violently; he trod him under his feet vehemently. خبط اللیل means, he walked about in the darkness of the night without finding the true way. تخبطه means, he struck or beat him violently. تخبطه الشیطان means, Satan struck him and afflicted him with hurt or injury; Satan prostrated him (Aqrab).
المس (insanity) is derived from مس. They say مسه i.e. he touched it; or he touched it with his hand. من المرض اوالکبر فلانا means, disease or old age touched him, i.e. came on him. مسه الشیطان بنصب وعذاب means, Satan brought pain and trouble on him. المسmeans, any pain or trouble, etc. that comes to a man by coming in contact with someone or something; it also signifies madness or insanity (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The prohibition against lending money on interest is preceded by a long exhortation to exercise charity. When a person becomes accustomed to spending his wealth in charity and alms, it becomes easier for him to lend money free of interest.
The Quran prohibits all kinds of interest. In modern times, however, business has become so inseparably mixed up with interest that it appears impossible to avoid interest altogether. But if a change of system as well as of surroundings and circumstances were brought about, business without interest would establish itself in the world as was the case in the days when Islam was in ascendancy.
The clause, those who devour interest do not rise except as rises one whom Satan has smitten with insanity, means that just as a madman does not see the consequences of his actions, similarly those who lend money at interest become careless of consequences. They keep in view only their own immediate interests and do not care, and in fact generally become incapable of caring, for the great harm which they do to society and the world at large. Interest also encourages a person or a government to incur debt beyond his or its capacity and in this way also blinds them to consequences. Another way in which interest causes a touch of insanity is to weaken the sense of goodness and beneficence in man by making him over-engrossed in money-making. Interest also leads to war. Money-lenders are always creating circumstances which may cause conflict between one nation and another so that war may break out and the belligerent nations may be compelled to borrow money from them. Interest also helps to prolong war by encouraging belligerent nations to borrow money beyond their capacity. Again, interest helps the accumulation of wealth in a few hands and thereby most injuriously affects the distribution of wealth and the balance of society. Yet another manifestation of madness caused by interest is that those who pay interest have their sense of dignity lowered and they contract the habit of carelessness and hastiness, thus acquiring a resemblance to one stricken by madness. See also 2:280 below.
The words, trade also is like interest, represent the pet argument of the supporters of interest. They say interest is nothing but a form of trade. Just as in trade one invests money with a view to increasing and multiplying it, so does one in lending money at interest. But deeper thinking would reveal that there is a world of difference between the two. While interest is attended by all the evil consequences briefly referred to above, trade is not.
The words, then will that which he received in the past be his, mean that if one accepts guidance from God and desists from charging interest in future, the past will be forgiven him and God will make good the loss he may thus suffer by other means.
It should be remembered that any sum stipulated to be received or given over and above what one advances or receives as a loan is interest, whether the dealing is with an individual or a bank or a society or a post office or any other organisation. Interest is not confined to money. It extends to any commodity which is given as a loan with the condition that it will be returned with an agreed excess.
Finally, it may be noted that in view of the peculiar conditions of the present times, when there is a vicious network of the interest system surrounding us and Islam is in a greatly weakened condition, the Holy Founder of the Ahmadiyya Movement has declared that if a person is forced to accept interest, he may do so and then spend the money thus received on (a) the propagation of Islam, and (b) paying off any interest that he may similarly be forced to pay. He should, however, scrupulously avoid spending such money on himself or his family or using it in any other way (Fatawa & Al-Fadl).
c
3:131; 30:40.
350
Riba literally meaning, an excess or addition, signifies an addition over and above the principal sum (Lane). It covers both usury and interest. According to the Hadith "every loan advanced to draw profits" comes under this definition. The connotation of Riba is not strictly identical with "interest," as commonly understood. But for lack of a better word "interest" may be used as a rough equivalent. In fact, any sum stipulated to be received or given over and above what one advances or receives as a loan is "interest," whether the dealing is with an individual or a bank or a society or a post office or any other organisation. "Interest" is not confined to money. It extends to any commodity which is given as a loan with the condition that it will be returned with an agreed excess.
351
The words signify that just as a mad man is heedless of the consequences of his actions, so are the moneylenders heartlessly oblivious of the moral and economic injury they do to individuals, the society and even the world at large. Riba also causes a touch of insanity in the moneylender in the sense that his entire engrossment in profit-making renders him insensible to all good causes. Riba is prohibited in Islam because it tends to draw wealth into the hands of a small circle and thereby adversely affects its equitable distribution. It promotes idleness in the moneylenders and kills in them all incentive to help others and chokes all springs of sympathetic behaviour. The moneylender takes advantage of, and makes profit from, the need and distress of others. While on the one hand Riba causes the lender to exploit other people’s wants, it creates in the debtor a tendency to do things carelessly and in haste, incurring debt regardless of his capacity to pay back, thus doing irreparabl
وَاتَّقُوۡا یَوۡمًا تُرۡجَعُوۡنَ فِیۡہِ اِلَی اللّٰہِ ۖ ثُمَّ تُوَفّٰی کُلُّ نَفۡسٍ مَّا کَسَبَتۡ وَہُمۡ لَا یُظۡلَمُوۡنَ
2:273.
See 2:273.
See 2:273.
Commentary:
The verse sums up the discussion on the subject of taking interest by warning the people that the day is coming when they will be made to stand before God and render an account of their deeds. They should remember the principle, "Do as you would be done by". The Holy Prophet is reported to have said,
"None of you can be deemed to be a true believer, unless he likes for his brother what he likes for himself" (Bukhari & Muslim).
a
2:273.
a
See 2:273.
288
Commentary:
The verse sums up the discussion on the subject of taking interest by warning the people that the day is coming when they will be made to stand before God and render an account of their deeds. They should remember the principle, "Do as you would be done by". The Holy Prophet is reported to have said,
"None of you can be deemed to be a true believer, unless he likes for his brother what he likes for himself" (Bukhari & Muslim).
a
See 2:273.
اَلَمۡ تَرَ اِلَی الَّذِیۡنَ اُوۡتُوۡا نَصِیۡبًا مِّنَ الۡکِتٰبِ یُدۡعَوۡنَ اِلٰی کِتٰبِ اللّٰہِ لِیَحۡکُمَ بَیۡنَہُمۡ ثُمَّ یَتَوَلّٰی فَرِیۡقٌ مِّنۡہُمۡ وَہُمۡ مُّعۡرِضُوۡنَ
24:49.
24:49.
(1) Prophecies contained in the Bible concerning the Holy Prophet which formed a portion of the Book; or (2) the genuine portion of the Bible, because only a portion of it had remained safe from interpolation and this alone could be called a part of the true Book; or (3) the Bible is but a portion of the Book as compared with the Qur’an which is the Book par excellence.
24:49.
Commentary:
The expression, portion of the Book, may refer to (1) the prophecies contained in the Bible concerning the Holy Prophet which formed a portion of the Book; or (2) the genuine portion of the Bible, because only a part of it had remained safe from interpolation and this alone could be called a part of the true Book; or (3) the expression may also mean that as compared with the Quran, which is the Book par excellence, being the eternal and perfect Divine Book, the Bible is but a portion and a part. In view of these different explanations, the verse would give different meanings: (a) that when the attention of Jews and Christians is drawn to the prophecies embodied in their Scriptures, they refuse to be guided by them. Or (b) that if the People of the Book had adhered to the genuine portion of their own Scriptures, the criteria laid down therein for testing the truth of a claimant to prophethood would have surely led them to accept the Holy Prophet. Or (c) that if they had faithfully acted on the teachings of their own Scriptures, which was in fact a part of the perfect and eternal teachings contained in the Quran, they would have certainly recognised the truth of the new Faith.
e
24:49.
b
24:49.
315
Commentary:
The expression, portion of the Book, may refer to (1) the prophecies contained in the Bible concerning the Holy Prophet which formed a portion of the Book; or (2) the genuine portion of the Bible, because only a part of it had remained safe from interpolation and this alone could be called a part of the true Book; or (3) the expression may also mean that as compared with the Quran, which is the Book par excellence, being the eternal and perfect Divine Book, the Bible is but a portion and a part. In view of these different explanations, the verse would give different meanings: (a) that when the attention of Jews and Christians is drawn to the prophecies embodied in their Scriptures, they refuse to be guided by them. Or (b) that if the People of the Book had adhered to the genuine portion of their own Scriptures, the criteria laid down therein for testing the truth of a claimant to prophethood would have surely led them to accept the Holy Prophet. Or (c) that if they had faithfully acted on the teachings of their own Scriptures, which was in fact a part of the perfect and eternal teachings contained in the Quran, they would have certainly recognised the truth of the new Faith.
b
24:49.
389
(1) Prophecies contained in the Bible concerning the Holy Prophet which formed a portion of the Book; or (2) the genuine portion of the Bible, because only a portion of it had remained safe from interpolation and this alone could be called a part of the true Book; or (3) the Bible is but a portion of the Book as compared with the Qur’an which is the Book par excellence.
۞ فَلَمَّاۤ اَحَسَّ عِیۡسٰی مِنۡہُمُ الۡکُفۡرَ قَالَ مَنۡ اَنۡصَارِیۡۤ اِلَی اللّٰہِ ۖ قَالَ الۡحَوَارِیُّوۡنَ نَحۡنُ اَنۡصَارُ اللّٰہِ اٰمَنَّا بِاللّٰہِ وَاشۡہَدۡ بِاَنَّا مُسۡلِمُوۡنَ
5:112; 61:15.
5:112; 61:15.
Hawariyyun is the plural of Hawariyy which means, (1) a washerman; (2) one tried and found to be free from vice or fault (3) a person of pure and unsullied character; (4) one who advises or counsels or acts honestly and faithfully; (5) a true and sincere friend or helper; (6) a select friend and helper of a Prophet (Lane & Mufradat).
5:112; 61:15.
Important Words:
الحواریون (disciples) is the plural of حواری (a disciple) which is derived from حار which means, he or it returned; or he became perplexed. حار الثوب means, he washed the cloth and rendered it white. حواری means: (1) one who whitens clothes by washing them, i.e. a washerman; (2) one who has been tried and found to be free from vice or fault; (3) a person of pure and unsullied character; (4) one who advises or counsels or acts honestly and faithfully; (5) a true and sincere friend or helper; (6) a select friend and helper of a Prophet; (7) a relation. The disciples of Jesus were called حواریون because they helped him in his work, or because they were white or pure of heart, or because they made the hearts of other people white and pure by their noble teachings and good example, or (as some have thought) because some of them were washermen by profession (Lane, Aqrab & Mufradat). The Quran has used the word in the sense of helpers, as the words that follow indicate.
Commentary:
In this verse, the Quran has cleared the disciples of Jesus of the serious lapses ascribed to them in the Gospels. They were sincere helpers in the cause of God, believing in the mission of Jesus and making no secret of their faith.
The word حواری as explained under Important Words above, signifies a reliable helper and disciple of a Prophet. From an authentic saying of the Holy Prophet, the word appears to have also been once applied by him to one of his trustworthy and distinguished Companions, Zubair bin ‘Awwam, who, on an occasion of great danger, went alone boldly in the enemy camp during an extremely cold and dark night and brought back necessary information (Bukhari).
c
5:112; 61:15.
b
5:112; 61:15.
342
Important Words:
الحواریون (disciples) is the plural of حواری (a disciple) which is derived from حار which means, he or it returned; or he became perplexed. حار الثوب means, he washed the cloth and rendered it white. حواری means: (1) one who whitens clothes by washing them, i.e. a washerman; (2) one who has been tried and found to be free from vice or fault; (3) a person of pure and unsullied character; (4) one who advises or counsels or acts honestly and faithfully; (5) a true and sincere friend or helper; (6) a select friend and helper of a Prophet; (7) a relation. The disciples of Jesus were called حواریون because they helped him in his work, or because they were white or pure of heart, or because they made the hearts of other people white and pure by their noble teachings and good example, or (as some have thought) because some of them were washermen by profession (Lane, Aqrab & Mufradat). The Quran has used the word in the sense of helpers, as the words that follow indicate.
Commentary:
In this verse, the Quran has cleared the disciples of Jesus of the serious lapses ascribed to them in the Gospels. They were sincere helpers in the cause of God, believing in the mission of Jesus and making no secret of their faith.
The word حواری as explained under Important Words above, signifies a reliable helper and disciple of a Prophet. From an authentic saying of the Holy Prophet, the word appears to have also been once applied by him to one of his trustworthy and distinguished Companions, Zubair bin ‘Awwam, who, on an occasion of great danger, went alone boldly in the enemy camp during an extremely cold and dark night and brought back necessary information (Bukhari).
c
5:112; 61:15.
422
Hawariyyun is the plural of Hawariyy which means, (1) a washerman; (2) one tried and found to be free from vice or fault (3) a person of pure and unsullied character; (4) one who advises or counsels or acts honestly and faithfully; (5) a true and sincere friend or helper; (6) a select friend and helper of a Prophet (Lane & Mufradat).
وَلۡتَکُنۡ مِّنۡکُمۡ اُمَّۃٌ یَّدۡعُوۡنَ اِلَی الۡخَیۡرِ وَیَاۡمُرُوۡنَ بِالۡمَعۡرُوۡفِ وَیَنۡہَوۡنَ عَنِ الۡمُنۡکَرِ ۚ وَاُولٰٓئِکَ ہُمُ الۡمُفۡلِحُوۡنَ
3:111, 115; 7:158; 9:71; 31:18.
Al-Khair here signifies Islam, because goodness in general is included in the word Ma‘ruf occurring immediately after it.
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said, 'If anyone of you sees anything evil, let him remove it with his hand. If he cannot do so with his hand, then let him forbid it with his tongue. If he cannot do even that, then let him at least hate it in his heart, and that is the weakest kind of faith' (Muslim).
3:111, 115; 7:158; 9:71; 31:18.
Commentary:
The word خیر (goodness) here signifies Islam, because goodness in general is included in the word معروف (equity) used immediately after it. In fact, the true Faith (Islam) is the only goodness in the true sense of the word. The verse purports to say that as by making you enter the fold of Islam God has delivered you from a pit of fire, you should also try to deliver others from the fire of disbelief.
The words, And let there be among you a body of men who should invite to goodness, do not mean that the duty of preaching is only confined to a few. What is meant is that, whereas all should try to preach and propagate the truth of Islam, there should be a party of men among Muslims who should be wholly and solely devoted to this work.
As for the method of preaching, the Quran says elsewhere, Call unto the way of thy Lord with wisdom and goodly exhortation and argue with them (the disbelievers) in a way that is best (16:126). And the Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "If anyone of you sees anything evil, let him remove it with his hand. If he cannot do it with his hand, then let him forbid it with his tongue. If he cannot do even that, then let him at least detest it in his mind, and that is the weakest kind of faith" (Muslim).
The verse also suggests a way by following which Muslims can maintain their unity. So long as a Muslim people have their attention concentrated on the preaching of Islam and doing good, they will live in peace among themselves, for disunion is mostly born of idleness and a false sense of security.
Each and every individual Muslim is not enjoined here to devote himself wholly to the preaching of Islam; for if it were so, Muslims could not earn their livelihood nor take part in other healthy pursuits of life. So, though all must contribute their quota, only a section of the community is required to devote itself exclusively to the work of preaching.
b
3:111, 115; 7:158; 9:71; 31:18.
269
اَلْخَيْر (Al-Khair) 这里意为伊斯兰教, 因为总的来说, 善已经包括在紧接在它后面出现的 مَعْرُوْف (Maruf) 这个词中。
a
3:111, 115; 7:158; 9:71; 31:18.
391
Commentary:
The word خیر (goodness) here signifies Islam, because goodness in general is included in the word معروف (equity) used immediately after it. In fact, the true Faith (Islam) is the only goodness in the true sense of the word. The verse purports to say that as by making you enter the fold of Islam God has delivered you from a pit of fire, you should also try to deliver others from the fire of disbelief.
The words, And let there be among you a body of men who should invite to goodness, do not mean that the duty of preaching is only confined to a few. What is meant is that, whereas all should try to preach and propagate the truth of Islam, there should be a party of men among Muslims who should be wholly and solely devoted to this work.
As for the method of preaching, the Quran says elsewhere, Call unto the way of thy Lord with wisdom and goodly exhortation and argue with them (the disbelievers) in a way that is best (16:126). And the Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "If anyone of you sees anything evil, let him remove it with his hand. If he cannot do it with his hand, then let him forbid it with his tongue. If he cannot do even that, then let him at least detest it in his mind, and that is the weakest kind of faith" (Muslim).
The verse also suggests a way by following which Muslims can maintain their unity. So long as a Muslim people have their attention concentrated on the preaching of Islam and doing good, they will live in peace among themselves, for disunion is mostly born of idleness and a false sense of security.
Each and every individual Muslim is not enjoined here to devote himself wholly to the preaching of Islam; for if it were so, Muslims could not earn their livelihood nor take part in other healthy pursuits of life. So, though all must contribute their quota, only a section of the community is required to devote itself exclusively to the work of preaching.
a
3:111, 115; 7:158; 9:71; 31:18.
452
Al-Khair here signifies Islam, because goodness in general is included in the word Ma‘ruf occurring immediately after it.
453
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said, 'If anyone of you sees anything evil, let him remove it with his hand. If he cannot do so with his hand, then let him forbid it with his tongue. If he cannot do even that, then let him at least hate it in his heart, and that is the weakest kind of faith' (Muslim).
اَلَمۡ تَرَ اِلَی الَّذِیۡنَ اُوۡتُوۡا نَصِیۡبًا مِّنَ الۡکِتٰبِ یَشۡتَرُوۡنَ الضَّلٰلَۃَ وَیُرِیۡدُوۡنَ اَنۡ تَضِلُّوا السَّبِیۡلَ
4:90.
4:90.
4:90.
a
4:90.
a
4:90.
a
4:90.
اَلَمۡ تَرَ اِلَی الَّذِیۡنَ یُزَکُّوۡنَ اَنۡفُسَہُمۡ ۚ بَلِ اللّٰہُ یُزَکِّیۡ مَنۡ یَّشَآءُ وَلَا یُظۡلَمُوۡنَ فَتِیۡلًا
4:78, 125; 17:72.
4:78, 125; 17:72.
4:78, 125; 17:72.
Important Words:
فتیلا (a whit) is derived from فتل. They say فتله i.e. he twisted it, as one twists a rope or a wick. One would say رجل محکم الفتلi.e. a man firm or compact, in respect of make, as though firmly twisted. فتیل means: (1) a twisted rope; (2) a small thread in the cleft of a date-stone; also the fine thread of dirt formed between two fingers or the palms of two hands when they are rubbed together; hence a thing of no worth or significance. They say ما اغنی عنك فتیلا meaning, I do not or cannot avail or profit thee a whit (Lane).
Commentary:
What led the Jews to shirk, or associating partners with God, was the erroneous idea that they were quite pure and needed no more Divine Reformers. Present-day Muslims, too, have fallen victim to similar deceptive notions. When a people become impure from the religious point of view, it is only God Who can bring about their reform by raising divinely inspired Reformers.
b
4:78, 125; 17:72.
a
4:78, 125; 17:72.
524
Important Words:
فتیلا (a whit) is derived from فتل. They say فتله i.e. he twisted it, as one twists a rope or a wick. One would say رجل محکم الفتلi.e. a man firm or compact, in respect of make, as though firmly twisted. فتیل means: (1) a twisted rope; (2) a small thread in the cleft of a date-stone; also the fine thread of dirt formed between two fingers or the palms of two hands when they are rubbed together; hence a thing of no worth or significance. They say ما اغنی عنك فتیلا meaning, I do not or cannot avail or profit thee a whit (Lane).
Commentary:
What led the Jews to shirk, or associating partners with God, was the erroneous idea that they were quite pure and needed no more Divine Reformers. Present-day Muslims, too, have fallen victim to similar deceptive notions. When a people become impure from the religious point of view, it is only God Who can bring about their reform by raising divinely inspired Reformers.
b
4:78, 125; 17:72.
اَلَمۡ تَرَ اِلَی الَّذِیۡنَ اُوۡتُوۡا نَصِیۡبًا مِّنَ الۡکِتٰبِ یُؤۡمِنُوۡنَ بِالۡجِبۡتِ وَالطّٰغُوۡتِ وَیَقُوۡلُوۡنَ لِلَّذِیۡنَ کَفَرُوۡا ہٰٓؤُلَآءِ اَہۡدٰی مِنَ الَّذِیۡنَ اٰمَنُوۡا سَبِیۡلًا
قرآن مجید میں جِبْت کا لفظ ہے اور لغت میں لکھا ہے کہ جِبْتٌ وہ چیز ہوتی ہے جس میں کوئی فائدہ نہ ہو (اقرب)
Al-Jibt means, an idol or idols; that wherein there is no good; a diviner; the Devil (Lane).
The Muslims believed in all the Prophets mentioned in the Bible and also in the Divine origin of the Law that was given to Moses, yet so great was the hatred of the Jews for them that they declared the idol-worshippers of Arabia, who rejected their Prophets as well as their Scriptures, to be better guided than the Muslims.
Important Words:
الجبت (evil things) means: (1) an idol or idols; or the name of a certain idol belonging to the Quraish; (2) that which is worshipped instead of God, whatever it be; (3) that wherein there is no good; (4) a diviner or an enchanter or the like; (5) the Devil or Satan; (6) enchantment or magic (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Muslims believed in all the Prophets mentioned in the Bible and also in the Divine origin of the Law that was given to Moses, yet so great was the hatred of Jews for them that they declared the idol-worshippers of Arabia, who rejected their Prophets as well as their Scriptures, to be better guided than Muslims. It is regrettable that some present-day Muslims also have the hardihood to say that it is better to renounce Islam than to accept Ahmad, the Promised Messiah, than whom there is no greater champion of Islam.
4
قرآن مجید میں جِبْت کا لفظ ہے اور لغت میں لکھا ہے کہ جِبْتٌ وہ چیز ہوتی ہے جس میں کوئی فائدہ نہ ہو (اقرب)
526
Important Words:
الجبت (evil things) means: (1) an idol or idols; or the name of a certain idol belonging to the Quraish; (2) that which is worshipped instead of God, whatever it be; (3) that wherein there is no good; (4) a diviner or an enchanter or the like; (5) the Devil or Satan; (6) enchantment or magic (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Muslims believed in all the Prophets mentioned in the Bible and also in the Divine origin of the Law that was given to Moses, yet so great was the hatred of Jews for them that they declared the idol-worshippers of Arabia, who rejected their Prophets as well as their Scriptures, to be better guided than Muslims. It is regrettable that some present-day Muslims also have the hardihood to say that it is better to renounce Islam than to accept Ahmad, the Promised Messiah, than whom there is no greater champion of Islam.
617
Al-Jibt means, an idol or idols; that wherein there is no good; a diviner; the Devil (Lane).
618
The Muslims believed in all the Prophets mentioned in the Bible and also in the Divine origin of the Law that was given to Moses, yet so great was the hatred of the Jews for them that they declared the idol-worshippers of Arabia, who rejected their Prophets as well as their Scriptures, to be better guided than the Muslims.
یٰۤاَیُّہَا الَّذِیۡنَ اٰمَنُوۡۤا اَطِیۡعُوا اللّٰہَ وَاَطِیۡعُوا الرَّسُوۡلَ وَاُولِی الۡاَمۡرِ مِنۡکُمۡ ۖ فَاِنۡ تَنٰزَعۡتُمۡ فِیۡ شَیۡءٍ فَرُدُّوۡہُ اِلَی اللّٰہِ وَالرَّسُوۡلِ اِنۡ کُنۡتُمۡ تُؤۡمِنُوۡنَ بِاللّٰہِ وَالۡیَوۡمِ الۡاٰخِرِ ۚ ذٰلِکَ خَیۡرٌ وَّاَحۡسَنُ تَاۡوِیۡلًا
4:84.
4:66.
为了指出对由法律恰当地指定的权威的服从就是对安拉和安拉的使者的服从, “服从” 这词是重复用在 “安拉” 和 “使者” 这两词前面, 而在那些 “当权的” 字句前面这词是省略的。体现在 “把它交给安拉和安拉的使者” 这句话中的指令可以指统治者之间的分歧, 也可以指被统治者内部的分歧。就前者而言就是, 如果统治者与被统治者对某事产生不同意见, 就应该按照 «古兰经» 的教导来决定;如意见不能一致就在圣行和圣训中找根据。可是, 如果 «古兰经»、圣行和圣训对此问题均未曾提到, 就应该留待有权处理穆斯林之间事务的当局去解决。这节经文似乎提到了那些特别跟国家大事有关的事情。在这方面的基本指令是, 对权力的完全服从不能超过安拉和他的使者的服从。可是, “如果对于社会问题等有不同意见和争论” 正如经文提及:“如果你们有分歧”, 那么, 应该按伊斯兰经典而不是按任何其它法律。
4:84
4:66
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law amounts to obedience to God and His Messenger. The injunction embodied in the words, "refer it to Allah and His Messenger" may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the Sunnah and the Hadith. If, however, the Qur’an, the Sunnah and the Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left to those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims. The verse seems to refer to matters concerning particularly the affairs of the State. The basic commandment in this respect is that all obedien
4:84.
4:66.
Important Words:
اولی الامر (those in authority) is made up of two words: (1) اولی which is originally اولوا meaning, possessors of or possessing or having; and (2) امر meaning, rule, authority, command, affair or matter, etc. اولی الامر means: (1) those who possess or hold authority command or rule; and (2) the learned men who, as it were, possess authority in knowledge (Taj & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law is in reality obedience to God and His Messenger.
The clause, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, means that in case of difference, the matter should be referred to the Quran and the authentic Sunnah and Hadith of the Holy Prophet. The injunction may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case, the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the authentic Sunnah and Hadith. If, however, the Quran, the Sunnah and Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left in the hands of those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims; and the latter are enjoined to abide by their decision even if they do not see eye to eye with them, because true obedience consists in obeying against one’s will and judgement. The words, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, may also mean that in case of a difference between the people and those in authority, the former are enjoined to do as Allah and His Messenger have bidden them to do on such occasions, i.e. that in such a case they should obey those in authority.
Primarily, however, the words, if you differ, do not refer to any differences between the rulers and the ruled but to disagreements arising among the ruled themselves. In this case the injunction embodied in the verse is that in matters pertaining to discipline and administration, Muslims should obey those in authority, but in disputes and differences regarding social matters, etc. they should be guided by the Law of Islam and not by other laws. This is the interpretation which Ibn Kathir (iii. 130-31) has adopted and which is in keeping with the context. The next verse also refers only to disputes among the ruled, and not to those between rulers and ruled.
The words, those in authority, in their wider significance include even such non-Muslims as may happen to be in authority over Muslims. In this case the additional words منکم would not mean "from among you" but simply "among you", i.e. "over you". The practice of the Holy Prophet as well as his sayings make it clear that in secular matters Muslims should obey even such of their rulers as are not Muslims.
a
4:84.
b
4:66.
332
为了指出对由法律恰当地指定的权威的服从就是对安拉和安拉的使者的服从, “服从” 这词是重复用在 “安拉” 和 “使者” 这两词前面, 而在那些 “当权的” 字句前面这词是省略的。体现在 “把它交给安拉和安拉的使者” 这句话中的指令可以指统治者之间的分歧, 也可以指被统治者内部的分歧。就前者而言就是, 如果统治者与被统治者对某事产生不同意见, 就应该按照 «古兰经» 的教导来决定;如意见不能一致就在圣行和圣训中找根据。可是, 如果 «古兰经»、圣行和圣训对此问题均未曾提到, 就应该留待有权处理穆斯林之间事务的当局去解决。这节经文似乎提到了那些特别跟国家大事有关的事情。在这方面的基本指令是, 对权力的完全服从不能超过安拉和他的使者的服从。可是, “如果对于社会问题等有不同意见和争论” 正如经文提及:“如果你们有分歧”, 那么, 应该按伊斯兰经典而不是按任何其它法律。
a
4:84.
b
4:66.
533
Important Words:
اولی الامر (those in authority) is made up of two words: (1) اولی which is originally اولوا meaning, possessors of or possessing or having; and (2) امر meaning, rule, authority, command, affair or matter, etc. اولی الامر means: (1) those who possess or hold authority command or rule; and (2) the learned men who, as it were, possess authority in knowledge (Taj & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law is in reality obedience to God and His Messenger.
The clause, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, means that in case of difference, the matter should be referred to the Quran and the authentic Sunnah and Hadith of the Holy Prophet. The injunction may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case, the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the authentic Sunnah and Hadith. If, however, the Quran, the Sunnah and Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left in the hands of those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims; and the latter are enjoined to abide by their decision even if they do not see eye to eye with them, because true obedience consists in obeying against one’s will and judgement. The words, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, may also mean that in case of a difference between the people and those in authority, the former are enjoined to do as Allah and His Messenger have bidden them to do on such occasions, i.e. that in such a case they should obey those in authority.
Primarily, however, the words, if you differ, do not refer to any differences between the rulers and the ruled but to disagreements arising among the ruled themselves. In this case the injunction embodied in the verse is that in matters pertaining to discipline and administration, Muslims should obey those in authority, but in disputes and differences regarding social matters, etc. they should be guided by the Law of Islam and not by other laws. This is the interpretation which Ibn Kathir (iii. 130-31) has adopted and which is in keeping with the context. The next verse also refers only to disputes among the ruled, and not to those between rulers and ruled.
The words, those in authority, in their wider significance include even such non-Muslims as may happen to be in authority over Muslims. In this case the additional words منکم would not mean "from among you" but simply "among you", i.e. "over you". The practice of the Holy Prophet as well as his sayings make it clear that in secular matters Muslims should obey even such of their rulers as are not Muslims.
a
4:84
b
4:66
623
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law amounts to obedience to God and His Messenger. The injunction embodied in the words, "refer it to Allah and His Messenger" may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the Sunnah and the Hadith. If, however, the Qur’an, the Sunnah and the Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left to those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims. The verse seems to refer to matters concerning particularly the affairs of the State. The basic commandment in this respect is that all obedien
اَلَمۡ تَرَ اِلَی الَّذِیۡنَ یَزۡعُمُوۡنَ اَنَّہُمۡ اٰمَنُوۡا بِمَاۤ اُنۡزِلَ اِلَیۡکَ وَمَاۤ اُنۡزِلَ مِنۡ قَبۡلِکَ یُرِیۡدُوۡنَ اَنۡ یَّتَحَاکَمُوۡۤا اِلَی الطّٰغُوۡتِ وَقَدۡ اُمِرُوۡۤا اَنۡ یَّکۡفُرُوۡا بِہٖ وَیُرِیۡدُ الشَّیۡطٰنُ اَنۡ یُّضِلَّہُمۡ ضَلٰلًۢا بَعِیۡدًا
یہ آیت منافقوں کے متعلق ہے جو رسولِ کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم سے فیصلہ کروانے کی بجائے دوسرے لوگوں کے فیصلہ کو پسند کرتے تھے۔
Commentary:
The words, They desire to seek judgement from the rebellious, need not be taken as referring to any particular incident; they speak of a general tendency among hypocrites.
2
یہ آیت منافقوں کے متعلق ہے جو رسولِ کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم سے فیصلہ کروانے کی بجائے دوسرے لوگوں کے فیصلہ کو پسند کرتے تھے۔
534
Commentary:
The words, They desire to seek judgement from the rebellious, need not be taken as referring to any particular incident; they speak of a general tendency among hypocrites.
اَلَمۡ تَرَ اِلَی الَّذِیۡنَ قِیۡلَ لَہُمۡ کُفُّوۡۤا اَیۡدِیَکُمۡ وَاَقِیۡمُوا الصَّلٰوۃَ وَاٰتُوا الزَّکٰوۃَ فَلَمَّا کُتِبَ عَلَیۡہِمُ الۡقِتَالُ اِذَا فَرِیۡقٌ مِّنۡہُمۡ یَخۡشَوۡنَ النَّاسَ کَخَشۡیَۃِ اللّٰہِ اَوۡ اَشَدَّ خَشۡیَۃً ۚ وَقَالُوۡا رَبَّنَا لِمَ کَتَبۡتَ عَلَیۡنَا الۡقِتَالَ لَوۡلَاۤ اَخَّرۡتَنَاۤ اِلٰۤی اَجَلٍ قَرِیۡبٍ ۗ قُلۡ مَتٰعُ الدُّنۡیَا قَلِیۡلٌ وَّالۡاٰخِرَۃُ خَیۡرٌ لِّمَنِ اتَّقٰی وَلَا تُظۡلَمُوۡنَ فَتِیۡلًا
2:247; 4:67.
14:45; 63:11.
9:38; 57:21.
See 4:50.
The verse refers to a class of men who show eagerness to fight when they are told not to fight, but when the actual time for fighting arrives, they refuse to fight or try to avoid it by various pretexts, thus showing that their former eagerness for fighting was either insincere or was due to temporary excitement.
2:247; 4:67.
14:45; 63:11.
9:38; 57:21.
See 4:50.
Commentary:
This verse refers to a class of men who show eagerness to fight when they are told not to fight, but when the actual time for fighting arrives, they refuse to fight or try to avoid it by various pretexts, thus showing that their former eagerness for fighting was either insincere or was only due to a temporary excitement.
The verse may also be regarded as referring to انصار (Helpers) of Medina who, before the advent of Islam to that city, were constantly at war among themselves. But when they accepted Islam, they were asked to cease fighting. When, however, they were called upon to take up arms to defend Islam, a section of them, who were always fighting among themselves before they embraced Islam, became afraid of fighting in the cause of God.
a
2:247; 4:67.
b
14:45; 63:11.
c
9:38; 57:21.
d
4:50.
a
2:247; 4:67.
b
14:45; 63:11.
c
9:38; 57:21.
d
See 4:50.
546
Commentary:
This verse refers to a class of men who show eagerness to fight when they are told not to fight, but when the actual time for fighting arrives, they refuse to fight or try to avoid it by various pretexts, thus showing that their former eagerness for fighting was either insincere or was only due to a temporary excitement.
The verse may also be regarded as referring to انصار (Helpers) of Medina who, before the advent of Islam to that city, were constantly at war among themselves. But when they accepted Islam, they were asked to cease fighting. When, however, they were called upon to take up arms to defend Islam, a section of them, who were always fighting among themselves before they embraced Islam, became afraid of fighting in the cause of God.
a
2:247; 4:67.
b
14:45; 63:11.
c
9:38; 57:21.
d
See 4:50.
634
The verse refers to a class of men who show eagerness to fight when they are told not to fight, but when the actual time for fighting arrives, they refuse to fight or try to avoid it by various pretexts, thus showing that their former eagerness for fighting was either insincere or was due to temporary excitement.
وَاِذَا جَآءَہُمۡ اَمۡرٌ مِّنَ الۡاَمۡنِ اَوِ الۡخَوۡفِ اَذَاعُوۡا بِہٖ ۖ وَلَوۡ رَدُّوۡہُ اِلَی الرَّسُوۡلِ وَاِلٰۤی اُولِی الۡاَمۡرِ مِنۡہُمۡ لَعَلِمَہُ الَّذِیۡنَ یَسۡتَنۡۢبِطُوۡنَہٗ مِنۡہُمۡ ۗ وَلَوۡلَا فَضۡلُ اللّٰہِ عَلَیۡکُمۡ وَرَحۡمَتُہٗ لَاتَّبَعۡتُمُ الشَّیۡطٰنَ اِلَّا قَلِیۡلًا
4:60.
4:60.
The reason why tidings relating to peace have been mentioned before those relating to fear is that the Qur’an is here speaking of war, and during war it is sometimes more dangerous to give publicity to matters likely to lead to happy results than to matters of fear. Under normal conditions, too, the injunction mentioned is very important, exercising direct influence on the discipline and well-being of society. The words, those in authority, refer to the Holy Prophet or his Successors or to the Chiefs appointed by them.
4:60.
Commentary:
The reason why tidings or matters relating to peace have been mentioned before those relating to fear is that the Quranis here speaking of war, and during war it is sometimes more dangerous to give publicity to matters likely to lead to happy results than to matters of fear. For instance, if any information comes that the forces of the enemy are about to attack, the publication of this news among the people may not prove so dangerous as disclosure of, for example, the news that the Muslim army was going to attack the enemy at a certain weak point of the latter. The latter class of news would disclose the intentions of the Muslim army to the enemy and he would take immediate steps to strengthen his position at the threatened point. Under normal conditions too the injunction is very important, exercising direct influence on the discipline and well-being of society.
The words, those in authority, refer to the Holy Prophet or his Successors or the chiefs appointed by both.
c
4:60.
a
4:60.
552
Commentary:
The reason why tidings or matters relating to peace have been mentioned before those relating to fear is that the Quranis here speaking of war, and during war it is sometimes more dangerous to give publicity to matters likely to lead to happy results than to matters of fear. For instance, if any information comes that the forces of the enemy are about to attack, the publication of this news among the people may not prove so dangerous as disclosure of, for example, the news that the Muslim army was going to attack the enemy at a certain weak point of the latter. The latter class of news would disclose the intentions of the Muslim army to the enemy and he would take immediate steps to strengthen his position at the threatened point. Under normal conditions too the injunction is very important, exercising direct influence on the discipline and well-being of society.
The words, those in authority, refer to the Holy Prophet or his Successors or the chiefs appointed by both.
c
4:60.
640
The reason why tidings relating to peace have been mentioned before those relating to fear is that the Qur’an is here speaking of war, and during war it is sometimes more dangerous to give publicity to matters likely to lead to happy results than to matters of fear. Under normal conditions, too, the injunction mentioned is very important, exercising direct influence on the discipline and well-being of society. The words, those in authority, refer to the Holy Prophet or his Successors or to the Chiefs appointed by them.
سَتَجِدُوۡنَ اٰخَرِیۡنَ یُرِیۡدُوۡنَ اَنۡ یَّاۡمَنُوۡکُمۡ وَیَاۡمَنُوۡا قَوۡمَہُمۡ کُلَّ مَا رُدُّوۡۤا اِلَی الۡفِتۡنَۃِ اُرۡکِسُوۡا فِیۡہَا ۚ فَاِنۡ لَّمۡ یَعۡتَزِلُوۡکُمۡ وَیُلۡقُوۡۤا اِلَیۡکُمُ السَّلَمَ وَیَکُفُّوۡۤا اَیۡدِیَہُمۡ فَخُذُوۡہُمۡ وَاقۡتُلُوۡہُمۡ حَیۡثُ ثَقِفۡتُمُوۡہُمۡ ۚ وَاُولٰٓئِکُمۡ جَعَلۡنَا لَکُمۡ عَلَیۡہِمۡ سُلۡطٰنًا مُّبِیۡنًا
33:15.
اوپر کی آیت میں معاہدین کا ذکر تھا۔ اس آیت میں منافقوں کا ذکر ہے۔ پس سلوک کا فرق حالات کی وجہ سے ہے۔
33:15.
9:5.
The reference seems to be to the two tribes, Asad and Ghatfan who had no treaty of alliance with the Muslims. They played a double game and awaited their opportunity. When invited by their people to join them in fighting against the Muslims, they readily accepted the invitation. The directions contained in these verses come into operation when a virtual state of war exists and danger stalks along the land.
By Fitnah is here meant, war with the Muslims.
33:15.
9:5.
Important Words:
ارکسوا (fall headlong) is in the passive voice and the right translation of it would be, "are made to fall headlong", or "are overthrown" etc. but for the sake of clearness the word has been translated here in the active voice. ارکسوا is formed from رکس. They say رکس الشیء i.e. he turned the thing over or upside down. ارکس الشیء means, he turned the thing to its former state; he turned or threw it over upon its head; he reversed it or turned it back; he made the first part of it to be the last. أرکس الله عدوك means, may God turn thine enemy upon his head; or may He overthrow him or change or reverse his condition (Lane & Aqrab).
الفتنة (hostility) generally meaning, (1) persecution, (2) mischief, (3) discord and dissension, (4) civil war, etc., also means war, i.e. hostility (Lane). See also 2:192.
سلطان (authority) is the noun-infinitive from سلط which means, he or it overcame, prevailed or predominated; he became firm or established in superior power; he possessed power or dominion or sovereignty; he was or became sharp; it was or became hard or strong; he was or became chaste or perspicuous in speech, or eloquent and sharp in tongue. They say قد جعلت لك سلطانا علی اخذ حقی من فلان i.e. I have given you the power or authority to take my dues from such a one. سلطان means, strength, might, force or power; predominance; power or authority; the sovereign or ruling power; king or ruler; sharpness; hardness; proof or argument; evidence; plea (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The reference in this verse is to those people who had no alliance with Muslims or any tribe having an alliance with them. They were time-servers who awaited their opportunity. The difference between these people and those mentioned in the previous verse is that the latter had some sort of alliance with this or that party though they did not
possess the strength to assert themselves, while the former only sought security by deceitful means and hastened to make common cause with the enemies of Islam whenever invited to do so. Fighting was enjoined against this class of people, unless they entered into a treaty of peace with Muslims and loyally observed its terms.
a
33:15.
1
اوپر کی آیت میں معاہدین کا ذکر تھا۔ اس آیت میں منافقوں کا ذکر ہے۔ پس سلوک کا فرق حالات کی وجہ سے ہے۔
a
33:15.
b
9:5.
560
Important Words:
ارکسوا (fall headlong) is in the passive voice and the right translation of it would be, "are made to fall headlong", or "are overthrown" etc. but for the sake of clearness the word has been translated here in the active voice. ارکسوا is formed from رکس. They say رکس الشیء i.e. he turned the thing over or upside down. ارکس الشیء means, he turned the thing to its former state; he turned or threw it over upon its head; he reversed it or turned it back; he made the first part of it to be the last. أرکس الله عدوك means, may God turn thine enemy upon his head; or may He overthrow him or change or reverse his condition (Lane & Aqrab).
الفتنة (hostility) generally meaning, (1) persecution, (2) mischief, (3) discord and dissension, (4) civil war, etc., also means war, i.e. hostility (Lane). See also 2:192.
سلطان (authority) is the noun-infinitive from سلط which means, he or it overcame, prevailed or predominated; he became firm or established in superior power; he possessed power or dominion or sovereignty; he was or became sharp; it was or became hard or strong; he was or became chaste or perspicuous in speech, or eloquent and sharp in tongue. They say قد جعلت لك سلطانا علی اخذ حقی من فلان i.e. I have given you the power or authority to take my dues from such a one. سلطان means, strength, might, force or power; predominance; power or authority; the sovereign or ruling power; king or ruler; sharpness; hardness; proof or argument; evidence; plea (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The reference in this verse is to those people who had no alliance with Muslims or any tribe having an alliance with them. They were time-servers who awaited their opportunity. The difference between these people and those mentioned in the previous verse is that the latter had some sort of alliance with this or that party though they did not
possess the strength to assert themselves, while the former only sought security by deceitful means and hastened to make common cause with the enemies of Islam whenever invited to do so. Fighting was enjoined against this class of people, unless they entered into a treaty of peace with Muslims and loyally observed its terms.
a
33:15.
b
9:5.
647
The reference seems to be to the two tribes, Asad and Ghatfan who had no treaty of alliance with the Muslims. They played a double game and awaited their opportunity. When invited by their people to join them in fighting against the Muslims, they readily accepted the invitation. The directions contained in these verses come into operation when a virtual state of war exists and danger stalks along the land.
648
By Fitnah is here meant, war with the Muslims.
۞ وَمَنۡ یُّہَاجِرۡ فِیۡ سَبِیۡلِ اللّٰہِ یَجِدۡ فِی الۡاَرۡضِ مُرٰغَمًا کَثِیۡرًا وَّسَعَۃً ۚ وَمَنۡ یَّخۡرُجۡ مِنۡۢ بَیۡتِہٖ مُہَاجِرًا اِلَی اللّٰہِ وَرَسُوۡلِہٖ ثُمَّ یُدۡرِکۡہُ الۡمَوۡتُ فَقَدۡ وَقَعَ اَجۡرُہٗ عَلَی اللّٰہِ ۗ وَکَانَ اللّٰہُ غَفُوۡرًا رَّحِیۡمًا
مُرَاغَمٌ: اَلْمَذْھَبُ وَ الْمَھْرَبُ راستہ اَلْحِصْنُ یعنی قلعہ۔ (اقرب) مُرَاغَمًا کَثِیْرًا اَیْ مَذْھَبًا یَذْھَبُ اِلَیْہِ یعنی مراغم کے معنے راستے کے ہیں۔ (مفردات)
Islam accepts no excuse from believers to stay in environments hostile to their Faith if they can afford to leave such localities.
Important Words:
مراغما (place of refuge) is derived from رغم. They say رغم أنفه meaning his nose clove to the dust, i.e. he became abased and humbled. رغمه means, he disliked it. ارغم اھله or راغم اھله means, he forsook or deserted his family against their wish. رغامmeans, earth or dust. مرغم or مراغم means, a road by travelling on which a man separates himself from his people against their wish or so as to displease them; a place to which one migrates; a place of refuge; a safe and fortified place (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse promises those sincere believers who are forced by circumstances to migrate from their homes in the cause of God abundant place of refuge and plentifulness. There is, therefore, no excuse for the people to stay at home surrounded by hostile disbelievers. But the motive must be good and the migration sincere.
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "Whoso migrates from his home for the sake of God and His Messenger, his migration will be regarded as having been performed for the sake of God and His Messenger and will be rewarded as such. But whoso leaves his home for the sake of a worldly gain which he wishes to get or for a woman whom he wishes to marry, will be considered to have migrated for the sake of the object for which he migrated, and his migration will not be considered as having been performed in the cause of God" (Bukhari, ch. on Bad’ul Wahy).
2
مُرَاغَمٌ: اَلْمَذْھَبُ وَ الْمَھْرَبُ راستہ اَلْحِصْنُ یعنی قلعہ۔ (اقرب) مُرَاغَمًا کَثِیْرًا اَیْ مَذْھَبًا یَذْھَبُ اِلَیْہِ یعنی مراغم کے معنے راستے کے ہیں۔ (مفردات)
569
Important Words:
مراغما (place of refuge) is derived from رغم. They say رغم أنفه meaning his nose clove to the dust, i.e. he became abased and humbled. رغمه means, he disliked it. ارغم اھله or راغم اھله means, he forsook or deserted his family against their wish. رغامmeans, earth or dust. مرغم or مراغم means, a road by travelling on which a man separates himself from his people against their wish or so as to displease them; a place to which one migrates; a place of refuge; a safe and fortified place (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse promises those sincere believers who are forced by circumstances to migrate from their homes in the cause of God abundant place of refuge and plentifulness. There is, therefore, no excuse for the people to stay at home surrounded by hostile disbelievers. But the motive must be good and the migration sincere.
The Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "Whoso migrates from his home for the sake of God and His Messenger, his migration will be regarded as having been performed for the sake of God and His Messenger and will be rewarded as such. But whoso leaves his home for the sake of a worldly gain which he wishes to get or for a woman whom he wishes to marry, will be considered to have migrated for the sake of the object for which he migrated, and his migration will not be considered as having been performed in the cause of God" (Bukhari, ch. on Bad’ul Wahy).
658
Islam accepts no excuse from believers to stay in environments hostile to their Faith if they can afford to leave such localities.
اِنَّ الۡمُنٰفِقِیۡنَ یُخٰدِعُوۡنَ اللّٰہَ وَہُوَ خٰدِعُہُمۡ وَاِذَا قَامُوۡۤا اِلَی الصَّلٰوۃِ قَامُوۡا کُسَالٰی یُرَآءُوۡنَ النَّاسَ وَلَا یَذۡکُرُوۡنَ اللّٰہَ اِلَّا قَلِیۡلًا
2:10.
9:54.
It is not God but the Holy Prophet whom, in reality, the hypocrites seek to deceive because the Prophet is an agent of God and all plots hatched against him are really so many plots hatched to frustrate the purpose of God. Therefore God Himself will punish them for their deceitful conduct. See also 2:16.
2:10.
9:54.
Important Words:
For the meaning of the word یخادعون and خادعھم see 2:10. The latter expression, though similar in root and construction, means "will punish them for their deception" and not "will deceive them". See also 2:16.
Commentary:
It is not the Holy Prophet but God Himself Whom in reality the hypocrites seek to deceive because the Prophet is only an agent of God and all plots hatched against him are really so many plots hatched to frustrate the purpose of God. Therefore, He Himself will punish them for their deceitful conduct.
Laziness and slowness are the characteristics of a hypocrite. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "The most burdensome of Prayers for the hypocrites are the late-evening and morning Prayers"; and "A hypocrite waits until the sun is about to set; then he gets up and hurriedly performs four Rak‘at of late-afternoon Prayer, and remembers God but little" (Muslim). It is only true faith and certainty that can engender in man the spirit of eagerness to live up to one’s conviction.
b
2:10.
c
9:54.
a
2:10.
b
9:54.
606
Important Words:
For the meaning of the word یخادعون and خادعھم see 2:10. The latter expression, though similar in root and construction, means "will punish them for their deception" and not "will deceive them". See also 2:16.
Commentary:
It is not the Holy Prophet but God Himself Whom in reality the hypocrites seek to deceive because the Prophet is only an agent of God and all plots hatched against him are really so many plots hatched to frustrate the purpose of God. Therefore, He Himself will punish them for their deceitful conduct.
Laziness and slowness are the characteristics of a hypocrite. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "The most burdensome of Prayers for the hypocrites are the late-evening and morning Prayers"; and "A hypocrite waits until the sun is about to set; then he gets up and hurriedly performs four Rak‘at of late-afternoon Prayer, and remembers God but little" (Muslim). It is only true faith and certainty that can engender in man the spirit of eagerness to live up to one’s conviction.
a
2:10.
b
9:54.
687
It is not God but the Holy Prophet whom, in reality, the hypocrites seek to deceive because the Prophet is an agent of God and all plots hatched against him are really so many plots hatched to frustrate the purpose of God. Therefore God Himself will punish them for their deceitful conduct. See also 2:16.
یٰۤاَیُّہَا الَّذِیۡنَ اٰمَنُوۡۤا اِذَا قُمۡتُمۡ اِلَی الصَّلٰوۃِ فَاغۡسِلُوۡا وُجُوۡہَکُمۡ وَاَیۡدِیَکُمۡ اِلَی الۡمَرَافِقِ وَامۡسَحُوۡا بِرُءُوۡسِکُمۡ وَاَرۡجُلَکُمۡ اِلَی الۡکَعۡبَیۡنِ ۚ وَاِنۡ کُنۡتُمۡ جُنُبًا فَاطَّہَّرُوۡا ۚ وَاِنۡ کُنۡتُمۡ مَّرۡضٰۤی اَوۡ عَلٰی سَفَرٍ اَوۡ جَآءَ اَحَدٌ مِّنۡکُمۡ مِّنَ الۡغَآئِطِ اَوۡ لٰمَسۡتُمُ النِّسَآءَ فَلَمۡ تَجِدُوۡا مَآءً فَتَیَمَّمُوۡا صَعِیۡدًا طَیِّبًا فَامۡسَحُوۡا بِوُجُوۡہِکُمۡ وَاَیۡدِیۡکُمۡ مِّنۡہُ ۚ مَا یُرِیۡدُ اللّٰہُ لِیَجۡعَلَ عَلَیۡکُمۡ مِّنۡ حَرَجٍ وَّلٰکِنۡ یُّرِیۡدُ لِیُطَہِّرَکُمۡ وَلِیُتِمَّ نِعۡمَتَہٗ عَلَیۡکُمۡ لَعَلَّکُمۡ تَشۡکُرُوۡنَ
2:186; 2:287.
اس کی وضاحت کے لئے دیکھئے نوٹ سورہ نساء آیت۴۴۔
2:186; 2:287.
The feet are here mentioned after the head, not because they are intended to be only wiped like the head, but because they come last in the process of ablution. This is apparent from the fact that the word Arjula (feet) has been put in the accusative case in the standard text, like the words Wujuha (faces) and Aidiya (hands), thus showing that, like the latter, the word "feet" is also governed in the accusative case by the verb "wash" and not by the particle ba’ (over) which governs the word Ru’us (heads) only.
See {610} - {612}.
2:186.
Important Words:
جنب (unclean) for which see 4:44.
Commentary:
After the questions of food and marriage comes the question of cleanliness on which Islam lays so much emphasis, specially on cleanliness necessary for the proper performance of worship. The feet are here mentioned after the head, not because they are intended, as alleged by the Shias, to be only wiped like the head, but because they come last in the process of ablution. This is apparent from the fact that the word ارجل (feet) has been put in the accusative case in the standard text, like the words وجوه (faces) and ایدی (hands), thus showing that, like the latter, the word "feet" is also governed in the accusative case by the verb اغسلوا (wash) and not by the particle با (over) which governs the word رؤس (heads) only. Hence the addition of the verb "wash" before it in the translation. It is true that a solitary reading gives the word ارجل(arjula) as ارجل (arjulin in the genitive case). But even this does not necessarily mean that the word is not governed by the verb اغسلوا (wash); for, according to the rules of Arabic grammar, nouns in the accusative case may sometimes be put in the genitive case owing to their proximity to a noun in the genitive case. According to this rule, ارجل (feet) would be taken to have been put in this reading in the genitive case owing to its proximity to the word رؤس (heads), but really it is governed not by the preposition با but by the verb اغسلوا. In fact, the word ارجل (feet) has been put after رؤس (heads) to point out the order which is to be observed in the performance of ablution. The authentic sayings of the Holy Prophet also make it clear that in performing an ablution the feet should be washed and not merely wiped. These sayings are also supported by the practice of the Holy Prophet.
There are, however, cases when the feet are not to be washed but simply "wiped" like the heads, e.g., when one is wearing socks or stockings. So it may be that the common reading arjula (in the accusative case) applies to the general rule of "washing" the feet when performing وضوء (ablution), while the exceptional reading arjuli (in the genitive case) applies to the exceptional cases when the feet are to be "wiped" like the head.
The words, you have touched women, embody a chaste and graceful expression and mean "you have had sexual intercourse with them".
The sense of the verse may be summed up as follows: (1) Before offering his Prayers, a Muslim should perform the prescribed ablution, i.e.washing of the face and the hands, wiping of the head, and washing of the feet. (2) If a man is جنب (unclean), i.e. he has had sexual intercourse with his wife or, for that matter, has had a nocturnal discharge, he should have a complete bath in order to purify himself for Prayers. (3) If, however, a man is sick and the process of ablution or bathing is likely to do him harm, or if he is on a journey and cannot find water, then even after answering the call of nature or becoming "unclean" by having sexual intercourse with his wife, he is allowed to forego the process of ablution or bathing and to perform instead the تیمم with pure dust. See also 4:44.
a
2:186; 2:287.
3
اس کی وضاحت کے لئے دیکھئے نوٹ سورہ نساء آیت۴۴۔
a
2:186.
646
Important Words:
جنب (unclean) for which see 4:44.
Commentary:
After the questions of food and marriage comes the question of cleanliness on which Islam lays so much emphasis, specially on cleanliness necessary for the proper performance of worship. The feet are here mentioned after the head, not because they are intended, as alleged by the Shias, to be only wiped like the head, but because they come last in the process of ablution. This is apparent from the fact that the word ارجل (feet) has been put in the accusative case in the standard text, like the words وجوه (faces) and ایدی (hands), thus showing that, like the latter, the word "feet" is also governed in the accusative case by the verb اغسلوا (wash) and not by the particle با (over) which governs the word رؤس (heads) only. Hence the addition of the verb "wash" before it in the translation. It is true that a solitary reading gives the word ارجل(arjula) as ارجل (arjulin in the genitive case). But even this does not necessarily mean that the word is not governed by the verb اغسلوا (wash); for, according to the rules of Arabic grammar, nouns in the accusative case may sometimes be put in the genitive case owing to their proximity to a noun in the genitive case. According to this rule, ارجل (feet) would be taken to have been put in this reading in the genitive case owing to its proximity to the word رؤس (heads), but really it is governed not by the preposition با but by the verb اغسلوا. In fact, the word ارجل (feet) has been put after رؤس (heads) to point out the order which is to be observed in the performance of ablution. The authentic sayings of the Holy Prophet also make it clear that in performing an ablution the feet should be washed and not merely wiped. These sayings are also supported by the practice of the Holy Prophet.
There are, however, cases when the feet are not to be washed but simply "wiped" like the heads, e.g., when one is wearing socks or stockings. So it may be that the common reading arjula (in the accusative case) applies to the general rule of "washing" the feet when performing وضوء (ablution), while the exceptional reading arjuli (in the genitive case) applies to the exceptional cases when the feet are to be "wiped" like the head.
The words, you have touched women, embody a chaste and graceful expression and mean "you have had sexual intercourse with them".
The sense of the verse may be summed up as follows: (1) Before offering his Prayers, a Muslim should perform the prescribed ablution, i.e.washing of the face and the hands, wiping of the head, and washing of the feet. (2) If a man is جنب (unclean), i.e. he has had sexual intercourse with his wife or, for that matter, has had a nocturnal discharge, he should have a complete bath in order to purify himself for Prayers. (3) If, however, a man is sick and the process of ablution or bathing is likely to do him harm, or if he is on a journey and cannot find water, then even after answering the call of nature or becoming "unclean" by having sexual intercourse with his wife, he is allowed to forego the process of ablution or bathing and to perform instead the تیمم with pure dust. See also 4:44.
a
2:186; 2:287.
725
The feet are here mentioned after the head, not because they are intended to be only wiped like the head, but because they come last in the process of ablution. This is apparent from the fact that the word Arjula (feet) has been put in the accusative case in the standard text, like the words Wujuha (faces) and Aidiya (hands), thus showing that, like the latter, the word "feet" is also governed in the accusative case by the verb "wash" and not by the particle ba’ (over) which governs the word Ru’us (heads) only.
725A
See {610} - {612}.
یَہۡدِیۡ بِہِ اللّٰہُ مَنِ اتَّبَعَ رِضۡوٰنَہٗ سُبُلَ السَّلٰمِ وَیُخۡرِجُہُمۡ مِّنَ الظُّلُمٰتِ اِلَی النُّوۡرِ بِاِذۡنِہٖ وَیَہۡدِیۡہِمۡ اِلٰی صِرٰطٍ مُّسۡتَقِیۡمٍ
2:258; 14:2; 33:44; 57:10; 65:12.
2:258; 14:2; 33:44; 57:10; 65:12.
2:258; 14:2; 33:44; 57:10; 65:12.
Commentary:
The pronoun in یھدی به (thereby does Allah guide) may refer either to the "Book" or the "Light" spoken of in the previous verse. The use of the word سبل (paths) in the plural number indicates that just as there are diverse kinds of difficulties and obstacles that beset the path of a spiritual wayfarer, so God has also provided for him many means of deliverance and safe arrival at his destination. السلام (peace) being also one of the names of God (see 50:24), the words سبل السلام may mean, "the paths leading to God".
The clause, and guides them to the right path, is added to show that the God of Islam not only leads men out of darkness into light but also does so by the shortest and the straightest path, the word مستقیم (right) also meaning "straight". See 2:6.
a
2:258; 14:2; 33:44; 57:10; 65:12.
a
2:258; 14:2; 33:44; 57:10; 65:12.
654
Commentary:
The pronoun in یھدی به (thereby does Allah guide) may refer either to the "Book" or the "Light" spoken of in the previous verse. The use of the word سبل (paths) in the plural number indicates that just as there are diverse kinds of difficulties and obstacles that beset the path of a spiritual wayfarer, so God has also provided for him many means of deliverance and safe arrival at his destination. السلام (peace) being also one of the names of God (see 50:24), the words سبل السلام may mean, "the paths leading to God".
The clause, and guides them to the right path, is added to show that the God of Islam not only leads men out of darkness into light but also does so by the shortest and the straightest path, the word مستقیم (right) also meaning "straight". See 2:6.
a
2:258; 14:2; 33:44; 57:10; 65:12.
وَلَمَّا جَآءَ مُوۡسٰی لِمِیۡقٰتِنَا وَکَلَّمَہٗ رَبُّہٗ قَالَ رَبِّ اَرِنِیۡۤ اَنۡظُرۡ اِلَیۡکَ ۚ قَالَ لَنۡ تَرٰٮنِیۡ وَلٰکِنِ انۡظُرۡ اِلَی الۡجَبَلِ فَاِنِ اسۡتَقَرَّ مَکَانَہٗ فَسَوۡفَ تَرٰٮنِیۡ ۚ فَلَمَّا تَجَلّٰی رَبُّہٗ لِلۡجَبَلِ جَعَلَہٗ دَکًّا وَّخَرَّ مُوۡسٰی صَعِقًا ۚ فَلَمَّاۤ اَفَاقَ قَالَ سُبۡحٰنَکَ تُبۡتُ اِلَیۡکَ وَاَنَا۠ اَوَّلُ الۡمُؤۡمِنِیۡنَ
2:254; 4:165.
这节经文对最重要的宗教论题之一--------是否人可以用肉眼见到安拉--------作了解释。这节经文并不支持用肉眼可以见到安拉的这种看法 (6:104)。用肉眼非但不能见到安拉, 也不能见到天使; 我们只能看到他们所显示的形式。同样地, 只能见到安拉的一种显示形式而不能见到他自己。因此, 像穆撒那样的安拉的一个伟大的先知, 他知道安拉所有的常德, 会要做一件做不到的事情, 这是不可理解的。穆撒知道他只能看到安拉的一种显示形式, 而不是安拉的本体。但是, 在从麦德彦去埃及的旅途中, 在那 “火光” 中已见到过安拉的一种显示形式。(28:30) 那么, “我的养主啊! 求你向我显示 (你的存在), 以便我看见你。” 这句话中所包含的他请求见到安拉又意味着什么呢? 这一请求看来指的是, 在较后一些时候, 在伊斯兰教的穆圣身上要发生的安拉最完美的显示形式。穆撒得到许诺说, 从以色列人的兄弟中将出现一个先知, 安拉要那个先知讲出他的话。(«申命记» 18:18-22) 这一预言意示, 安拉将给予比过去给予穆撒的更大的显示形式。因此, 他自然极想见到那许诺的将会是怎样一种安拉光荣和伟大的显示形式。他但愿能见到安拉可能向他显示那种光荣和伟大的形式。他被告知说, 那种显示形式非他的能力可能承受, 它不能在他心上发生, 而且安拉已经选择高山作为他在物质上的显示形式。那高山剧烈地震摇, 它看来好像已经破碎, 穆撒由于震摇的冲击而跌下, 失去了知觉。这使他认识到, 他的精神还没有达到那种高超的阶段使他可以成为他请求见到的安拉显示形式的那种对象。那个唯一的特殊地位是留给比他伟大得多的人--------安拉的创造物的冠冕--------圣洁的先知, 穆罕默德。穆撒的请求也可以认为是由于以色列家族的前辈要想肉眼见到安拉的事情所引起的。(2:56) 他的这一个不寻常的感受使穆撒认识到自己的请求是不合时宜的。因此他自发地大声说道, “我归向你, 我是 (这个时代) 第一个信仰者。”这句话意味着他认识到自己没有被授予那种能力使他能够见到安拉光荣的那种完美的显示形式。而那种完美的显示形式将发生在主许的先知的心上。他第一个相信那个伟大的先知命定会达到这种伟大精神的卓越地位。穆撒对穆圣的这一信念, 在46:11节经文中也曾谈及。
那座高山并没有真正破碎。这是句譬喻的话, 用来表达地震的极大严重性(读《出埃及记》24:18)。
2:254; 4:165.
This verse sheds some light on one of the most important religious subjects—whether it is possible for one to see God with the physical eyes. The verse lends no support to the view that God is visible to the physical eyes (6:104). Not to say of seeing God with the physical eyes, man cannot even see angels; we can see only a manifestation of them. Similarly, only a manifestation of God can be seen and not God Himself. It is, therefore, inconceivable that a great Prophet of God like Moses, with all his knowledge of the attributes of God, should have desired an impossibility. Moses knew that he could see only a manifestation of God and not God Himself. But he had already seen a manifestation of God in "the Fire" when travelling from Midian to Egypt (28:30). What then did Moses mean by his request to see God, contained in the words, My Lord, show Thyself to me that I may look at Thee. The request seems to refer to the perfect manifestation of God which was to take place in the person of the Holy Proph
The mountain was not actually broken into pieces. The words have been used figuratively to express the great severity of the earthquake. See Exod. 24: 18.
2:254; 4:165.
Important Words:
تجلی (manifested Himself) is derived from جلا . They say جلاالامر i.e. the affair was or became clear, manifest, displayed, uncovered or laid open. تجلی الشیء i.e. the thing became manifest or apparent. تجلی الشیء used transitively means, he looked at the thing standing upon a higher position. The Quranic expression فلماتجلی ربه للجبل means, when his Lord became manifest to the mountain, i.e. when He manifested Himself on the mountain (Lane & Aqrab).
دکا (pieces) is the noun-infinitive from دك i.e. he broke or crushed or pounded a thing. They say دك الارض i.e. he made even the elevations and depressions of the earth. دکته الحمی means, fever weakened him. دك , therefore, means, an even or level place; a land broken and made even; a crumbled mountain; a mound or hill or dust or earth such as is a sandhill. The Quranic words جعله دکا means, He made it even or level; or He made it crumbled (Lane).
Commentary:
This verse sheds light on one of the most important religious subjects—whether it is possible for one to see God with the physical eyes. The verse lends no support to the view that God is visible to the physical eyes. Let alone seeing Him, the human eye cannot even see angels. Says the Quran: If God had appointed as Messenger an angel, He would have made him appear as a man (6:10). As we cannot see angels but only a manifestation of them, similarly we can see only a manifestation of God, and not God Himself. It is, therefore, inconceivable that a great Prophet of God like Moses with all his knowledge of the attributes of God, should have desired an impossibility. Moses knew that he could see only a manifestation of God and not God Himself. But he had already seen a manifestation of God in "the fire" when travelling from Midian to Egypt (28:30). What then did Moses mean by his request to see God, contained in the words, My Lord, show Thyself to me that I may look at Thee? The request seems to refer to the Perfect manifestation of God that was not granted to Moses but was to take place at the time of the Holy Prophet of Islam who was to be a مثیل or like of Moses. Indeed, Moses had already been given the promise that there was to appear, from among the brethren of the Israelites, a Prophet in whose mouth God was to put His word (Deut. 18:18-22). The words in which the promise was given implied a greater manifestation of God than had been vouchsafed to Moses. So Moses was naturally anxious to see what sort of God’s Glory and Majesty the promised Manifestation would be. He, therefore, wished that something of that Glory and Majesty might be shown to him. But a manifestation of that Glory was beyond the capacity of Moses to bear; it could not take place in or upon his heart. He was, therefore, asked to see a manifestation of it taking place at the Mount. But this should not be understood to mean that the Mount was to serve as a receptacle for the Great Glory: for, according to the Quran (33:73), the heart of Moses was certainly more capable of enduring it than the Mount. The Mount thus served only as the site or locality where that great manifestation was to take place. But even this proved too much for the Mount which shook violently.
The effect on the Mount was similar in nature to that produced on a Companion of the Holy Prophet when the latter’s head happened to be resting on his thigh at a time when a revelation descended on the Prophet. He felt such a heavy weight on his thigh that he feared that it would be crushed under it. Moses, too, could not bear to see the manifestation of Divine Power and Majesty and fell down unconscious, in spite of the fact that he had been warned beforehand of the terrible quaking that was to overtake the Mount. Thus it was that Moses realised that he did not possess the capacity for that powerful manifestation of Divine glory which was to take place later through the Holy Prophet of Islam. This is why when he recovered his senses, Moses cried, Holy art Thou, I turn towards Thee, and I am the first to believe. These words meant that he had realized that he did not possess the capacity for that perfect manifestation of Divine glory which was to take place through the Promised Prophet and that he was the first believer in the great spiritual eminence which that Prophet was destined to attain. This belief of Moses in the Holy Prophet has also been referred to in 46:11.
The words, He broke it into pieces, should not be taken literally, for the Mount was not actually broken into pieces. The words are used figuratively to express the great severity of the earthquake.
It may be also noted here that Moses was told to look at the mountain, and he was also told that he would see God if it remained in its place. The laying down of this condition shows that Moses had not asked for an impossible thing; for the laying down of a condition for an impossible thing is evidently meaningless.
The words, look at the mountain, implied that he should look outside himself because the manifestations could not take place within him. The fact that Moses fell down in a swoon shows that he did witness some manifestation, though only partly and imperfectly. The manifestation that takes place in the heart is permanent and lasting, while that which takes place outside is only temporary and passing.
A reference to this request of Moses to see God is to be found in Exod. 33:18.
d
2:254; 4:165.
517
这节经文对最重要的宗教论题之一--------是否人可以用肉眼见到安拉--------作了解释。这节经文并不支持用肉眼可以见到安拉的这种看法 (6:104)。用肉眼非但不能见到安拉, 也不能见到天使; 我们只能看到他们所显示的形式。同样地, 只能见到安拉的一种显示形式而不能见到他自己。因此, 像穆撒那样的安拉的一个伟大的先知, 他知道安拉所有的常德, 会要做一件做不到的事情, 这是不可理解的。穆撒知道他只能看到安拉的一种显示形式, 而不是安拉的本体。但是, 在从麦德彦去埃及的旅途中, 在那 “火光” 中已见到过安拉的一种显示形式。(28:30) 那么, “我的养主啊! 求你向我显示 (你的存在), 以便我看见你。” 这句话中所包含的他请求见到安拉又意味着什么呢? 这一请求看来指的是, 在较后一些时候, 在伊斯兰教的穆圣身上要发生的安拉最完美的显示形式。穆撒得到许诺说, 从以色列人的兄弟中将出现一个先知, 安拉要那个先知讲出他的话。(«申命记» 18:18-22) 这一预言意示, 安拉将给予比过去给予穆撒的更大的显示形式。因此, 他自然极想见到那许诺的将会是怎样一种安拉光荣和伟大的显示形式。他但愿能见到安拉可能向他显示那种光荣和伟大的形式。他被告知说, 那种显示形式非他的能力可能承受, 它不能在他心上发生, 而且安拉已经选择高山作为他在物质上的显示形式。那高山剧烈地震摇, 它看来好像已经破碎, 穆撒由于震摇的冲击而跌下, 失去了知觉。这使他认识到, 他的精神还没有达到那种高超的阶段使他可以成为他请求见到的安拉显示形式的那种对象。那个唯一的特殊地位是留给比他伟大得多的人--------安拉的创造物的冠冕--------圣洁的先知, 穆罕默德。穆撒的请求也可以认为是由于以色列家族的前辈要想肉眼见到安拉的事情所引起的。(2:56) 他的这一个不寻常的感受使穆撒认识到自己的请求是不合时宜的。因此他自发地大声说道, “我归向你, 我是 (这个时代) 第一个信仰者。”这句话意味着他认识到自己没有被授予那种能力使他能够见到安拉光荣的那种完美的显示形式。而那种完美的显示形式将发生在主许的先知的心上。他第一个相信那个伟大的先知命定会达到这种伟大精神的卓越地位。穆撒对穆圣的这一信念, 在46:11节经文中也曾谈及。
518
那座高山并没有真正破碎。这是句譬喻的话, 用来表达地震的极大严重性(读《出埃及记》24:18)。
a
2:254; 4:165.
1033
Important Words:
تجلی (manifested Himself) is derived from جلا . They say جلاالامر i.e. the affair was or became clear, manifest, displayed, uncovered or laid open. تجلی الشیء i.e. the thing became manifest or apparent. تجلی الشیء used transitively means, he looked at the thing standing upon a higher position. The Quranic expression فلماتجلی ربه للجبل means, when his Lord became manifest to the mountain, i.e. when He manifested Himself on the mountain (Lane & Aqrab).
دکا (pieces) is the noun-infinitive from دك i.e. he broke or crushed or pounded a thing. They say دك الارض i.e. he made even the elevations and depressions of the earth. دکته الحمی means, fever weakened him. دك , therefore, means, an even or level place; a land broken and made even; a crumbled mountain; a mound or hill or dust or earth such as is a sandhill. The Quranic words جعله دکا means, He made it even or level; or He made it crumbled (Lane).
Commentary:
This verse sheds light on one of the most important religious subjects—whether it is possible for one to see God with the physical eyes. The verse lends no support to the view that God is visible to the physical eyes. Let alone seeing Him, the human eye cannot even see angels. Says the Quran: If God had appointed as Messenger an angel, He would have made him appear as a man (6:10). As we cannot see angels but only a manifestation of them, similarly we can see only a manifestation of God, and not God Himself. It is, therefore, inconceivable that a great Prophet of God like Moses with all his knowledge of the attributes of God, should have desired an impossibility. Moses knew that he could see only a manifestation of God and not God Himself. But he had already seen a manifestation of God in "the fire" when travelling from Midian to Egypt (28:30). What then did Moses mean by his request to see God, contained in the words, My Lord, show Thyself to me that I may look at Thee? The request seems to refer to the Perfect manifestation of God that was not granted to Moses but was to take place at the time of the Holy Prophet of Islam who was to be a مثیل or like of Moses. Indeed, Moses had already been given the promise that there was to appear, from among the brethren of the Israelites, a Prophet in whose mouth God was to put His word (Deut. 18:18-22). The words in which the promise was given implied a greater manifestation of God than had been vouchsafed to Moses. So Moses was naturally anxious to see what sort of God’s Glory and Majesty the promised Manifestation would be. He, therefore, wished that something of that Glory and Majesty might be shown to him. But a manifestation of that Glory was beyond the capacity of Moses to bear; it could not take place in or upon his heart. He was, therefore, asked to see a manifestation of it taking place at the Mount. But this should not be understood to mean that the Mount was to serve as a receptacle for the Great Glory: for, according to the Quran (33:73), the heart of Moses was certainly more capable of enduring it than the Mount. The Mount thus served only as the site or locality where that great manifestation was to take place. But even this proved too much for the Mount which shook violently.
The effect on the Mount was similar in nature to that produced on a Companion of the Holy Prophet when the latter’s head happened to be resting on his thigh at a time when a revelation descended on the Prophet. He felt such a heavy weight on his thigh that he feared that it would be crushed under it. Moses, too, could not bear to see the manifestation of Divine Power and Majesty and fell down unconscious, in spite of the fact that he had been warned beforehand of the terrible quaking that was to overtake the Mount. Thus it was that Moses realised that he did not possess the capacity for that powerful manifestation of Divine glory which was to take place later through the Holy Prophet of Islam. This is why when he recovered his senses, Moses cried, Holy art Thou, I turn towards Thee, and I am the first to believe. These words meant that he had realized that he did not possess the capacity for that perfect manifestation of Divine glory which was to take place through the Promised Prophet and that he was the first believer in the great spiritual eminence which that Prophet was destined to attain. This belief of Moses in the Holy Prophet has also been referred to in 46:11.
The words, He broke it into pieces, should not be taken literally, for the Mount was not actually broken into pieces. The words are used figuratively to express the great severity of the earthquake.
It may be also noted here that Moses was told to look at the mountain, and he was also told that he would see God if it remained in its place. The laying down of this condition shows that Moses had not asked for an impossible thing; for the laying down of a condition for an impossible thing is evidently meaningless.
The words, look at the mountain, implied that he should look outside himself because the manifestations could not take place within him. The fact that Moses fell down in a swoon shows that he did witness some manifestation, though only partly and imperfectly. The manifestation that takes place in the heart is permanent and lasting, while that which takes place outside is only temporary and passing.
A reference to this request of Moses to see God is to be found in Exod. 33:18.
b
2:254; 4:165.
1046
This verse sheds some light on one of the most important religious subjects—whether it is possible for one to see God with the physical eyes. The verse lends no support to the view that God is visible to the physical eyes (6:104). Not to say of seeing God with the physical eyes, man cannot even see angels; we can see only a manifestation of them. Similarly, only a manifestation of God can be seen and not God Himself. It is, therefore, inconceivable that a great Prophet of God like Moses, with all his knowledge of the attributes of God, should have desired an impossibility. Moses knew that he could see only a manifestation of God and not God Himself. But he had already seen a manifestation of God in "the Fire" when travelling from Midian to Egypt (28:30). What then did Moses mean by his request to see God, contained in the words, My Lord, show Thyself to me that I may look at Thee. The request seems to refer to the perfect manifestation of God which was to take place in the person of the Holy Proph
1047
The mountain was not actually broken into pieces. The words have been used figuratively to express the great severity of the earthquake. See Exod. 24: 18.
وَاَنۡزَلۡنَاۤ اِلَیۡکَ الۡکِتٰبَ بِالۡحَقِّ مُصَدِّقًا لِّمَا بَیۡنَ یَدَیۡہِ مِنَ الۡکِتٰبِ وَمُہَیۡمِنًا عَلَیۡہِ ۖ فَاحۡکُمۡ بَیۡنَہُمۡ بِمَاۤ اَنۡزَلَ اللّٰہُ ۖ وَلَا تَتَّبِعۡ اَہۡوَآءَہُمۡ عَمَّا جَآءَکَ مِنَ الۡحَقِّ ۚ لِکُلٍّ جَعَلۡنَا مِنۡکُمۡ شِرۡعَۃً وَّمِنۡہَاجًا ۚ وَلَوۡ شَآءَ اللّٰہُ لَجَعَلَکُمۡ اُمَّۃً وّٰحِدَۃً وَّلٰکِنۡ لِّیَبۡلُوَکُمۡ فِیۡ مَاۤ اٰتٰٮکُمۡ ۖ فَاسۡتَبِقُوا الۡخَیۡرٰتِ ۚ اِلَی اللّٰہِ مَرۡجِعُکُمۡ جَمِیۡعًا فَیُنَبِّئُکُمۡ بِمَا کُنۡتُمۡ فِیۡہِ تَخۡتَلِفُوۡنَ
5:50.
10:100; 11:119; 16:10.
3:134; 35:33; 57:22.
6:106; 39:3.
مُهَيْمِنْ (Muhaimin) 的意思是, 证明、证人; 安全与治安的提供者; 人们事务的管理和监督者; 保护人 (Lisan)。«古兰经» 在这里被称为是过去许多经典的保护者, 这意思是, 它保存了那些经典中所有不朽的以及具有永恒价值的一切经义, 并去除了缺乏永恒因素和不能满足人类需要的内容。还有, 因为它受到安拉的保护, 它不会受到窜改; 而这种保护的恩典是其他经典所享受不到的。
شِرْعَة (Shir‘ah) 意指安拉的教律, 它由诸如与斋戒、拜功、朝觐及其它许多虔诚行为有关的条例所组成; 一种明显而正直的信仰和行为方式 (Lane)。مِنْهَاج (Minhaj) 的意思是明显的、非常清晰而畅通的道路 (Lane)。اَلْمُبَرَّد (Al-Mubarrad) 说, 前一单词意指一条道路的开始, 而后一单词意指这条道路已被踏成结实的路身 (قَدِيْر, Qadir)。因此, شِرْعَة (Shir‘ah) 多半是与精神事态有关的法律而 Minhaj 是与世俗事务有关的法律。Shir‘ah 也意指一条通向水的道路。这意思是, 安拉按照每个人的能力为他的所有创造物安排了各种方法使他们能找到通向精神 (进步) 泉源, 即安拉的启示的道路。
شِرْعَۃٌ کے معنے پانی تک پہنچنے کے چھوٹے راستہ کے ہوتے ہیں اور مِنْھَاج کے معنے بڑے راستہ کے ہوتے ہیں۔ اس آیت میں بتایا گیا ہے کہ خدائی کلام کے نور کو حاصل کرنے کے لئے قرآن کریم میں ہر استعداد کے مطابق تعلیم موجود ہے۔ اور وہ ایک کامل کتاب ہے۔
10:100; 11:119; 16:10.
6:106; 39:3.
5:50.
3:134; 35:33; 57:22.
Muhaimin means, witness; afforder of security and peace; controller and superintendent of the affairs of men; guardian and protector (Lisan). The Qur’an is here spoken of as a guardian over the previous Scriptures in the sense that it has preserved all that was imperishable and of permanent worth and value in them, and has left out that which lacked the element of permanence and failed to meet the needs of mankind. Again, it is called a guardian over the previous Scriptures because it enjoys Divine protection against being tampered with, a blessing denied to them.
Shir‘ah signifies the religious Law of God consisting of such ordinances as those about Fasting, Prayer and Pilgrimage and other acts of piety; a way of belief and conduct which is manifest and right (Lane). Minhaj means, manifest, plainly apparent and open road or way (Lane). Al-Mubarrad says that the former word signifies the beginning of a way and the latter the well-trodden body of it (Qadir). Thus Shir‘ah is the law that mostly relates to spiritual matters and Minhaj is the law that relates to secular matters. Shir‘ah also means, a way leading to water. The meaning is that God has equipped all His creatures, according to the capacity of each, with the means to find the way to the spring of spiritual water, i.e. Divine revelation.
6:107; 39:3.
5:50.
10:100; 11:119; 16:10.
3:134; 35:33; 57:22.
Important Words:
مھیمنا (guardian) is derived from ھیمن. They say ھیمن الرجل i.e. the man said, Amen. ھیمن الطائر علی فراخه means, the bird fluttered its wings over its young. ھیمن فلان علی کذا means, such a one became a protector and guardian over it. المھیمن when used about God means, He Who affords security and protection to His creatures when they are in a state of fear and danger (Aqrab). According to Lisan, the word مھیمن is derived from ھمن which is originally امن, the active participle مھیمنbeing really مؤامن. The word مھیمن means, witness; afforder of security and peace; controller and superintendent of the affairs of men; guardian and protector (Lisan).
شرعة (clear spiritual Law) is derived from شرع. They say شرع فی الامر i.e. he entered into the affair; or he entered upon or commenced the affair. شرع المال means, he brought the cattle to the watering place so that they might drink water. شرع الله لنا کذا means, God made it apparent or manifest to us; or God prescribed it for us as a religious Law. شرعة means, a custom; the religious Law of God consisting of such ordinances as those of Fasting, Prayer and Pilgrimage and other acts of piety; a way of belief and conduct which is manifest and right. شریعة means, a watering place such as is permanent and apparent to the eye, like the water of rivers, to which men and beasts resort; a way to water; religion or way of belief and practice (Lane).
منھاج (manifest way in secular matters) is derived from نھج i.e. it (a road or way) became manifest, plainly apparent or open; or he rendered (a road or an affair) manifest, plainly apparent or open. المنھاج or النھج means, a manifest, plainly apparent and open road or way (Lane). Al-Mubarrad says that شرعة signifies the beginning of a way and منھاج signifies the well-trodden body of it (Qadir). Thus شرعة would be mostly law relating to spiritual matters and منھاج law relating to secular matters.
Commentary:
The Quran is spoken of as a guardian over the previous Scriptures in the sense that it has preserved all that was true and permanent in them by embodying the same in itself, and has left out what lacked the element of permanence and failed to meet the needs of all mankind at all times. Again, it is called a guardian over Scriptures because it enjoys Divine protection against being tampered with, a blessing denied to other revealed Scriptures. All that is of permanent use in the previous Scriptures has been preserved in the Quran.
The words, for each of you, mean that not only for every nation but for every individual also God has appointed two clear ways, one pertaining to spiritual and the other to secular matters.
This verse also supplies an answer to the question, why God did not raise one Prophet for the whole of mankind in the beginning of the world, so that all peoples might have become one. The verse says that God has done so to "try" men and find out their fitness for the final Law. It is like appointing different stages of examinations to test the ability of students and thus raise them gradually to the final and topmost class.
a
5:50.
b
10:100; 11:119; 16:10.
c
3:134; 35:33; 57:22.
e
6:106; 39:3.
379
مُهَيْمِنْ (Muhaimin) 的意思是, 证明、证人; 安全与治安的提供者; 人们事务的管理和监督者; 保护人 (Lisan)。«古兰经» 在这里被称为是过去许多经典的保护者, 这意思是, 它保存了那些经典中所有不朽的以及具有永恒价值的一切经义, 并去除了缺乏永恒因素和不能满足人类需要的内容。还有, 因为它受到安拉的保护, 它不会受到窜改; 而这种保护的恩典是其他经典所享受不到的。
380
شِرْعَة (Shir‘ah) 意指安拉的教律, 它由诸如与斋戒、拜功、朝觐及其它许多虔诚行为有关的条例所组成; 一种明显而正直的信仰和行为方式 (Lane)。مِنْهَاج (Minhaj) 的意思是明显的、非常清晰而畅通的道路 (Lane)。اَلْمُبَرَّد (Al-Mubarrad) 说, 前一单词意指一条道路的开始, 而后一单词意指这条道路已被踏成结实的路身 (قَدِيْر, Qadir)。因此, شِرْعَة (Shir‘ah) 多半是与精神事态有关的法律而 Minhaj 是与世俗事务有关的法律。Shir‘ah 也意指一条通向水的道路。这意思是, 安拉按照每个人的能力为他的所有创造物安排了各种方法使他们能找到通向精神 (进步) 泉源, 即安拉的启示的道路。
2
شِرْعَۃٌ کے معنے پانی تک پہنچنے کے چھوٹے راستہ کے ہوتے ہیں اور مِنْھَاج کے معنے بڑے راستہ کے ہوتے ہیں۔ اس آیت میں بتایا گیا ہے کہ خدائی کلام کے نور کو حاصل کرنے کے لئے قرآن کریم میں ہر استعداد کے مطابق تعلیم موجود ہے۔ اور وہ ایک کامل کتاب ہے۔
a
6:107; 39:3.
b
5:50.
c
10:100; 11:119; 16:10.
d
3:134; 35:33; 57:22.
680
Important Words:
مھیمنا (guardian) is derived from ھیمن. They say ھیمن الرجل i.e. the man said, Amen. ھیمن الطائر علی فراخه means, the bird fluttered its wings over its young. ھیمن فلان علی کذا means, such a one became a protector and guardian over it. المھیمن when used about God means, He Who affords security and protection to His creatures when they are in a state of fear and danger (Aqrab). According to Lisan, the word مھیمن is derived from ھمن which is originally امن, the active participle مھیمنbeing really مؤامن. The word مھیمن means, witness; afforder of security and peace; controller and superintendent of the affairs of men; guardian and protector (Lisan).
شرعة (clear spiritual Law) is derived from شرع. They say شرع فی الامر i.e. he entered into the affair; or he entered upon or commenced the affair. شرع المال means, he brought the cattle to the watering place so that they might drink water. شرع الله لنا کذا means, God made it apparent or manifest to us; or God prescribed it for us as a religious Law. شرعة means, a custom; the religious Law of God consisting of such ordinances as those of Fasting, Prayer and Pilgrimage and other acts of piety; a way of belief and conduct which is manifest and right. شریعة means, a watering place such as is permanent and apparent to the eye, like the water of rivers, to which men and beasts resort; a way to water; religion or way of belief and practice (Lane).
منھاج (manifest way in secular matters) is derived from نھج i.e. it (a road or way) became manifest, plainly apparent or open; or he rendered (a road or an affair) manifest, plainly apparent or open. المنھاج or النھج means, a manifest, plainly apparent and open road or way (Lane). Al-Mubarrad says that شرعة signifies the beginning of a way and منھاج signifies the well-trodden body of it (Qadir). Thus شرعة would be mostly law relating to spiritual matters and منھاج law relating to secular matters.
Commentary:
The Quran is spoken of as a guardian over the previous Scriptures in the sense that it has preserved all that was true and permanent in them by embodying the same in itself, and has left out what lacked the element of permanence and failed to meet the needs of all mankind at all times. Again, it is called a guardian over Scriptures because it enjoys Divine protection against being tampered with, a blessing denied to other revealed Scriptures. All that is of permanent use in the previous Scriptures has been preserved in the Quran.
The words, for each of you, mean that not only for every nation but for every individual also God has appointed two clear ways, one pertaining to spiritual and the other to secular matters.
This verse also supplies an answer to the question, why God did not raise one Prophet for the whole of mankind in the beginning of the world, so that all peoples might have become one. The verse says that God has done so to "try" men and find out their fitness for the final Law. It is like appointing different stages of examinations to test the ability of students and thus raise them gradually to the final and topmost class.
a
10:100; 11:119; 16:10.
b
6:106; 39:3.
c
5:50.
d
3:134; 35:33; 57:22.
752
Muhaimin means, witness; afforder of security and peace; controller and superintendent of the affairs of men; guardian and protector (Lisan). The Qur’an is here spoken of as a guardian over the previous Scriptures in the sense that it has preserved all that was imperishable and of permanent worth and value in them, and has left out that which lacked the element of permanence and failed to meet the needs of mankind. Again, it is called a guardian over the previous Scriptures because it enjoys Divine protection against being tampered with, a blessing denied to them.
753
Shir‘ah signifies the religious Law of God consisting of such ordinances as those about Fasting, Prayer and Pilgrimage and other acts of piety; a way of belief and conduct which is manifest and right (Lane). Minhaj means, manifest, plainly apparent and open road or way (Lane). Al-Mubarrad says that the former word signifies the beginning of a way and the latter the well-trodden body of it (Qadir). Thus Shir‘ah is the law that mostly relates to spiritual matters and Minhaj is the law that relates to secular matters. Shir‘ah also means, a way leading to water. The meaning is that God has equipped all His creatures, according to the capacity of each, with the means to find the way to the spring of spiritual water, i.e. Divine revelation.
وَاِذَا نَادَیۡتُمۡ اِلَی الصَّلٰوۃِ اتَّخَذُوۡہَا ہُزُوًا وَّلَعِبًا ۚ ذٰلِکَ بِاَنَّہُمۡ قَوۡمٌ لَّا یَعۡقِلُوۡنَ
Commentary:
The verse cites an instance of how the People of the Book and idolaters made a jest of the religion of Islam.
689
Commentary:
The verse cites an instance of how the People of the Book and idolaters made a jest of the religion of Islam.
اَفَلَا یَتُوۡبُوۡنَ اِلَی اللّٰہِ وَیَسۡتَغۡفِرُوۡنَہٗ ۚ وَاللّٰہُ غَفُوۡرٌ رَّحِیۡمٌ
为了拯救人类不需要代替别人的牺牲。安拉自己会宽恕一切罪恶。只需要一颗真正悔悟之心就能求取他的宽恕。
No vicarious sacrifice is needed for the salvation of man. God Himself can forgive all sins. Only a truly penitent and contrite heart is required to attract His forgiveness.
Commentary:
No vicarious sacrifice is needed for the salvation of man. God himself can forgive all sins. Only a truly penitent and contrite heart is required to attract His forgiveness. Why the Christians then do not turn to God and entreat Him to pardon their sins? What need is there to resort to, and depend on, an unintelligible doctrine that Jesus, "Son of God", was crucified to atone for the sins of men and that those who wish to have their sins forgiven should believe in this atonement. The verse points out that, as God possesses full power to forgive, so those who sincerely repent of their sins and turn to Him with truly penitent hearts can always hope to find Him Forgiving and Merciful.
388
为了拯救人类不需要代替别人的牺牲。安拉自己会宽恕一切罪恶。只需要一颗真正悔悟之心就能求取他的宽恕。
705
Commentary:
No vicarious sacrifice is needed for the salvation of man. God himself can forgive all sins. Only a truly penitent and contrite heart is required to attract His forgiveness. Why the Christians then do not turn to God and entreat Him to pardon their sins? What need is there to resort to, and depend on, an unintelligible doctrine that Jesus, "Son of God", was crucified to atone for the sins of men and that those who wish to have their sins forgiven should believe in this atonement. The verse points out that, as God possesses full power to forgive, so those who sincerely repent of their sins and turn to Him with truly penitent hearts can always hope to find Him Forgiving and Merciful.
779
No vicarious sacrifice is needed for the salvation of man. God Himself can forgive all sins. Only a truly penitent and contrite heart is required to attract His forgiveness.
وَاِذَا سَمِعُوۡا مَاۤ اُنۡزِلَ اِلَی الرَّسُوۡلِ تَرٰۤی اَعۡیُنَہُمۡ تَفِیۡضُ مِنَ الدَّمۡعِ مِمَّا عَرَفُوۡا مِنَ الۡحَقِّ ۖ یَقُوۡلُوۡنَ رَبَّنَاۤ اٰمَنَّا فَاکۡتُبۡنَا مَعَ الشّٰہِدِیۡنَ
3:54, 194.
3:54, 194.
The verse has also been applied to the Najashi in particular. When Ja‘far, a cousin of the Holy Prophet and spokesman of Muslim refugees in Abyssinia read to him the opening verses of the Surah Maryam, the Najashi was visibly moved and tears rolled down his cheeks and he said in a voice full of pathos that that exactly was his belief about Jesus, and that he did not look upon him by even a twig more than that (Hisham).
3:54, 194.
Commentary:
The description given in this verse of some of the Christians of the time of the Holy Prophet applies to all those who have a real hankering after truth and are ready to accept it wherever they find it. The verse has also been applied to Najjashi in particular. When Ja‘far, a cousin of the Holy Prophet and the spokesman of Muslim refugees to Abyssinia, tried to make clear their attitude towards Jesus and to dispel the suspicion caused by the Meccan emissaries about the alleged derogatory language used by the Quran concerning Jesus and read to Najjashithe opening verses of the chapter Maryam, the latter, along with such of his companions as feared God, was visibly moved, and tears rolled down his cheeks and he said in a voice full of pathos that that exactly was his belief about Jesus, and that he did not look upon him by even a twig more than that (Hisham, i. 305, 306).
a
3:54, 194.
a
3:54, 194.
714
Commentary:
The description given in this verse of some of the Christians of the time of the Holy Prophet applies to all those who have a real hankering after truth and are ready to accept it wherever they find it. The verse has also been applied to Najjashi in particular. When Ja‘far, a cousin of the Holy Prophet and the spokesman of Muslim refugees to Abyssinia, tried to make clear their attitude towards Jesus and to dispel the suspicion caused by the Meccan emissaries about the alleged derogatory language used by the Quran concerning Jesus and read to Najjashithe opening verses of the chapter Maryam, the latter, along with such of his companions as feared God, was visibly moved, and tears rolled down his cheeks and he said in a voice full of pathos that that exactly was his belief about Jesus, and that he did not look upon him by even a twig more than that (Hisham, i. 305, 306).
a
3:54, 194.
788
The verse has also been applied to the Najashi in particular. When Ja‘far, a cousin of the Holy Prophet and spokesman of Muslim refugees in Abyssinia read to him the opening verses of the Surah Maryam, the Najashi was visibly moved and tears rolled down his cheeks and he said in a voice full of pathos that that exactly was his belief about Jesus, and that he did not look upon him by even a twig more than that (Hisham).
یٰۤاَیُّہَا الَّذِیۡنَ اٰمَنُوۡا عَلَیۡکُمۡ اَنۡفُسَکُمۡ ۖ لَا یَضُرُّکُمۡ مَّنۡ ضَلَّ اِذَا اہۡتَدَیۡتُمۡ ۚ اِلَی اللّٰہِ مَرۡجِعُکُمۡ جَمِیۡعًا فَیُنَبِّئُکُمۡ بِمَا کُنۡتُمۡ تَعۡمَلُوۡنَ
2:138.
2:138.
Our duty only is to preach the truth to others. If they accept it, well and good, but if in spite of our best efforts they refuse to be weaned from their evil course, their rejection of truth will do us no harm. In no case should we compromise our principles in order to win others over to our way of thinking. That would be ruining our own souls to save the souls of others and that indeed would be a bad bargain.
2:138.
Commentary:
This verse tells us that though man can sacrifice his worldly interests for the sake of others, yet he cannot so sacrifice his beliefs and religious principles. In religious matters our duty is only to show people the right path and exhort them to follow it; but we should not ruin or wrong our souls for their sake. It cannot profit mankind nor ourselves if we lose our own soul in trying to save others. The body may be sacrificed but not the soul. Christians abandoned some of the fundamental principles of their religion, hoping to win over certain heathen nations to Christianity. But in doing so they lost the truth and struck a very bad bargain.
The verse, however, should not be understood to mean that we should not preach the truth to others, and should confine our attention to saving our own souls only and have no thought for others. In fact, the Quran enjoins upon every Muslim to try his utmost to make others see truth, because firstly, it is our duty to propagate truth; and secondly, placed as we are, we cannot properly save ourselves unless we also save those among whom we live. What the verse, therefore, means is that our duty is only to preach truth to others. If they accept it, well and good; but if, in spite of our efforts, they refuse to be weaned from their evil course, their rejection of the truth will do us no harm. But in no circumstances should we compromise our principles in order to win others over to our way of thinking. That would be ruining our own souls to save others.
There is a hadith to the effect that once the Holy Prophet explained this verse as meaning that you should preach truth under all circumstances but when you see that the person to whom you preach truth persists in following his own evil inclinations and does not listen to you, then your duty will have ended by your having preached to him the truth, and in this case his evil practices would do you no harm, if only you yourselves scrupulously follow the truth (Tirmidhi, ch. on Tafsir).
The words, He who goes astray cannot harm you when you yourselves are rightly guided, may also mean that if you do the right sort of preaching and try to find the right way of approach to a person and even then he does not accept the truth, then his going astray will not harm you and you will not be held responsible for it. In this case, the words, when you yourselves are rightly guided, would mean, "if you succeed in finding out the right way of preaching and put in the right sort of effort".
a
2:138.
b
2:138.
733
Commentary:
This verse tells us that though man can sacrifice his worldly interests for the sake of others, yet he cannot so sacrifice his beliefs and religious principles. In religious matters our duty is only to show people the right path and exhort them to follow it; but we should not ruin or wrong our souls for their sake. It cannot profit mankind nor ourselves if we lose our own soul in trying to save others. The body may be sacrificed but not the soul. Christians abandoned some of the fundamental principles of their religion, hoping to win over certain heathen nations to Christianity. But in doing so they lost the truth and struck a very bad bargain.
The verse, however, should not be understood to mean that we should not preach the truth to others, and should confine our attention to saving our own souls only and have no thought for others. In fact, the Quran enjoins upon every Muslim to try his utmost to make others see truth, because firstly, it is our duty to propagate truth; and secondly, placed as we are, we cannot properly save ourselves unless we also save those among whom we live. What the verse, therefore, means is that our duty is only to preach truth to others. If they accept it, well and good; but if, in spite of our efforts, they refuse to be weaned from their evil course, their rejection of the truth will do us no harm. But in no circumstances should we compromise our principles in order to win others over to our way of thinking. That would be ruining our own souls to save others.
There is a hadith to the effect that once the Holy Prophet explained this verse as meaning that you should preach truth under all circumstances but when you see that the person to whom you preach truth persists in following his own evil inclinations and does not listen to you, then your duty will have ended by your having preached to him the truth, and in this case his evil practices would do you no harm, if only you yourselves scrupulously follow the truth (Tirmidhi, ch. on Tafsir).
The words, He who goes astray cannot harm you when you yourselves are rightly guided, may also mean that if you do the right sort of preaching and try to find the right way of approach to a person and even then he does not accept the truth, then his going astray will not harm you and you will not be held responsible for it. In this case, the words, when you yourselves are rightly guided, would mean, "if you succeed in finding out the right way of preaching and put in the right sort of effort".
a
2:138.
799
Our duty only is to preach the truth to others. If they accept it, well and good, but if in spite of our best efforts they refuse to be weaned from their evil course, their rejection of truth will do us no harm. In no case should we compromise our principles in order to win others over to our way of thinking. That would be ruining our own souls to save the souls of others and that indeed would be a bad bargain.
وَاِذۡ اَوۡحَیۡتُ اِلَی الۡحَوَارِیّٖنَ اَنۡ اٰمِنُوۡا بِیۡ وَبِرَسُوۡلِیۡ قَالُوۡۤا اٰمَنَّا وَاشۡہَدۡ بِاَنَّنَا مُسۡلِمُوۡنَ
3:53, 54; 61:15.
3:53, 54; 61:15.
3:53-54; 61:15.
Important Words:
The verb اوحی (inspired) does not always mean verbal revelation. It sometimes simply means to inspire a person with an idea, or to suggest it to him; and it is in this sense that the word is used here. The word has also been used with reference to the bee (16:89).
الحوارین (disciples). See 3:53.
d
3:53, 54; 61:15.
a
3:53-54; 61:15.
739
Important Words:
The verb اوحی (inspired) does not always mean verbal revelation. It sometimes simply means to inspire a person with an idea, or to suggest it to him; and it is in this sense that the word is used here. The word has also been used with reference to the bee (16:89).
الحوارین (disciples). See 3:53.
b
3:53, 54; 61:15.
وَلَوۡ اَنَّہُمۡ رَضُوۡا مَاۤ اٰتٰٮہُمُ اللّٰہُ وَرَسُوۡلُہٗ وَقَالُوۡا حَسۡبُنَا اللّٰہُ سَیُؤۡتِیۡنَا اللّٰہُ مِنۡ فَضۡلِہٖ وَرَسُوۡلُہٗۤ اِنَّاۤ اِلَی اللّٰہِ رٰغِبُوۡنَ
ثُمَّ رُدُّوۡۤا اِلَی اللّٰہِ مَوۡلٰٮہُمُ الۡحَقِّ ۚ اَلَا لَہُ الۡحُکۡمُ وَہُوَ اَسۡرَعُ الۡحٰسِبِیۡنَ
Commentary:
The reader should note that when speaking of death, the Quran uses the expression "When death comes to anyone of you" (see the preceding verse which uses the singular number), while in the present verse it refers to the Resurrection of all men together by saying, "Then are they returned to Allah." This is because whereas death comes to men individually and not to all men together, the Resurrection of mankind will be simultaneous and universal.
808
Commentary:
The reader should note that when speaking of death, the Quran uses the expression "When death comes to anyone of you" (see the preceding verse which uses the singular number), while in the present verse it refers to the Resurrection of all men together by saying, "Then are they returned to Allah." This is because whereas death comes to men individually and not to all men together, the Resurrection of mankind will be simultaneous and universal.
قُلۡ اَنَدۡعُوۡا مِنۡ دُوۡنِ اللّٰہِ مَا لَا یَنۡفَعُنَا وَلَا یَضُرُّنَا وَنُرَدُّ عَلٰۤی اَعۡقَابِنَا بَعۡدَ اِذۡ ہَدٰٮنَا اللّٰہُ کَالَّذِی اسۡتَہۡوَتۡہُ الشَّیٰطِیۡنُ فِی الۡاَرۡضِ حَیۡرَانَ لَہٗۤ اَصۡحٰبٌ یَّدۡعُوۡنَہٗۤ اِلَی الۡہُدَی ائۡتِنَا ۗ قُلۡ اِنَّ ہُدَی اللّٰہِ ہُوَ الۡہُدٰی ۖ وَاُمِرۡنَا لِنُسۡلِمَ لِرَبِّ الۡعٰلَمِیۡنَ
21:67; 22:78.
21:67; 22:78.
The verse likens the case of an idol-worshipper to that of a distracted person who has no fixed course to pursue. But a true believer has a fixed purpose and a fixed goal in life. He always prays to the One God with a deep-rooted conviction and does not wander about distracted like an idolater.
21:67; 22:74.
Important Words:
استھوته (entice away) is derived from ھوی. They say ھوی الشیء i.e. the thing fell down or came down (from a higher to a lower place). Conversely ھوی الرجل الجبل means, the man climbed the hill. ھوت الریح means, the wind blew.ھویة means, he loved and desired it. الـھوی means, love of good or evil; desire; inclination; evil inclination or desire. استھواء means, he took away all his desire and reason leaving him confounded; he made his evil desires look fair in his eyes (Aqrab). الـھوی also means, inclination of the soul or the mind to a thing; an object of love; the inclination of the soul to that in which the animal appetites take delight, without any lawful invitation thereto; opinion swerving from the right way or from the truth (Lane).
حیران (bewildered) is derived from حار which means, he was or became dazzled by a thing at which he looked, so that he turned away his eyes from it; he was or became confounded or perplexed and unable to see his right course; he erred or lost his way. حیران means, in a state of confusion or perplexity, being unable to see his right course; erring; having lost his way (Lane).
Commentary:
The opening clause of the verse teaches by means of an example how to preach the truth. It points out that the best way to preach is to begin by exposing the errors of the opposing party as hinted in the words, neither profit us nor harm us, and then to proceed to point out the truth as hinted in the words, after Allah has guided us.
The verse then gives an apt illustration to expose the futility of شرك i.e. attributing co-partners to God. It compares the case of an idol-worshipper to that of a distracted person who has no fixed course to pursue. Such a person first goes to one idol or to the tomb of one saint and then to another and has no certainty or conviction. But a true believer has a fixed purpose and a fixed goal. He always prays to the One God with a deep-rooted conviction and does not wander about distracted like an idolater.
The reader will note that, true to its own principle, the verse first exposes the error of idolaters and then enunciates the teachings of Islam.
d
21:67; 22:78.
a
21:67; 22:74.
817
Important Words:
استھوته (entice away) is derived from ھوی. They say ھوی الشیء i.e. the thing fell down or came down (from a higher to a lower place). Conversely ھوی الرجل الجبل means, the man climbed the hill. ھوت الریح means, the wind blew.ھویة means, he loved and desired it. الـھوی means, love of good or evil; desire; inclination; evil inclination or desire. استھواء means, he took away all his desire and reason leaving him confounded; he made his evil desires look fair in his eyes (Aqrab). الـھوی also means, inclination of the soul or the mind to a thing; an object of love; the inclination of the soul to that in which the animal appetites take delight, without any lawful invitation thereto; opinion swerving from the right way or from the truth (Lane).
حیران (bewildered) is derived from حار which means, he was or became dazzled by a thing at which he looked, so that he turned away his eyes from it; he was or became confounded or perplexed and unable to see his right course; he erred or lost his way. حیران means, in a state of confusion or perplexity, being unable to see his right course; erring; having lost his way (Lane).
Commentary:
The opening clause of the verse teaches by means of an example how to preach the truth. It points out that the best way to preach is to begin by exposing the errors of the opposing party as hinted in the words, neither profit us nor harm us, and then to proceed to point out the truth as hinted in the words, after Allah has guided us.
The verse then gives an apt illustration to expose the futility of شرك i.e. attributing co-partners to God. It compares the case of an idol-worshipper to that of a distracted person who has no fixed course to pursue. Such a person first goes to one idol or to the tomb of one saint and then to another and has no certainty or conviction. But a true believer has a fixed purpose and a fixed goal. He always prays to the One God with a deep-rooted conviction and does not wander about distracted like an idolater.
The reader will note that, true to its own principle, the verse first exposes the error of idolaters and then enunciates the teachings of Islam.
a
21:67; 22:78.
862
The verse likens the case of an idol-worshipper to that of a distracted person who has no fixed course to pursue. But a true believer has a fixed purpose and a fixed goal in life. He always prays to the One God with a deep-rooted conviction and does not wander about distracted like an idolater.
وَجَعَلُوۡا لِلّٰہِ مِمَّا ذَرَاَ مِنَ الۡحَرۡثِ وَالۡاَنۡعٰمِ نَصِیۡبًا فَقَالُوۡا ہٰذَا لِلّٰہِ بِزَعۡمِہِمۡ وَہٰذَا لِشُرَکَآئِنَا ۖ فَمَا کَانَ لِشُرَکَآئِہِمۡ فَلَا یَصِلُ اِلَی اللّٰہِ ۖ وَمَا کَانَ لِلّٰہِ فَہُوَ یَصِلُ اِلٰی شُرَکَآئِہِمۡ ۗ سَآءَ مَا یَحۡکُمُوۡنَ
16:57.
16:57.
The reference is to an idolatrous custom of the Arabs. They would divide the produce of their lands between God and their deities. If the portion which they set apart for their deities was spent for other purposes, then the portion which they had reserved for God was given away as charity in the name of their deities, but if the portion set apart for God was spent for other ends, then the portion set aside for the deities was not transferred to God.
16:57.
Commentary:
Note the point and the force in the words, He has produced. By using these words, the Quran exposes the folly of disbelievers who are presumptuous enough to divide the produce of the earth and cattle between their deities and God, as if they were the owners; while the fact is that God is the owner of all these things and it is He Who has brought them into existence. They are God’s things, and it is strange that disbelievers should presume to divide God’s things according to their own choice, setting apart only a portion for God, the True Owner, and allotting the rest to their false deities.
Disbelievers gave two kinds of alms; firstly, in the name of God, and secondly, in the name of their deities. If the portion which they set apart for their deities was spent for other purposes, then the portion which they had reserved for God was also given away as charity in the name of their deities, but if the portion set apart for God was spent for other ends, then the portion set aside for the deities was not transferred to God. That is what is meant by the words, that which is for their idols reaches not Allah, while that which is for Allah reaches their idols. This is another instance of how men blunder, making laws with the sole aid of reason.
The expression, as they imagine, signifies that God does not accept a charity which false gods are made to share with Him. Disbelievers suppose that they have set apart a portion for God, but that is not really the portion of God, for the jealous God disdainfully rejects such allotment.
e
16:57.
a
16:57.
876
Commentary:
Note the point and the force in the words, He has produced. By using these words, the Quran exposes the folly of disbelievers who are presumptuous enough to divide the produce of the earth and cattle between their deities and God, as if they were the owners; while the fact is that God is the owner of all these things and it is He Who has brought them into existence. They are God’s things, and it is strange that disbelievers should presume to divide God’s things according to their own choice, setting apart only a portion for God, the True Owner, and allotting the rest to their false deities.
Disbelievers gave two kinds of alms; firstly, in the name of God, and secondly, in the name of their deities. If the portion which they set apart for their deities was spent for other purposes, then the portion which they had reserved for God was also given away as charity in the name of their deities, but if the portion set apart for God was spent for other ends, then the portion set aside for the deities was not transferred to God. That is what is meant by the words, that which is for their idols reaches not Allah, while that which is for Allah reaches their idols. This is another instance of how men blunder, making laws with the sole aid of reason.
The expression, as they imagine, signifies that God does not accept a charity which false gods are made to share with Him. Disbelievers suppose that they have set apart a portion for God, but that is not really the portion of God, for the jealous God disdainfully rejects such allotment.
d
16:57.
914
The reference is to an idolatrous custom of the Arabs. They would divide the produce of their lands between God and their deities. If the portion which they set apart for their deities was spent for other purposes, then the portion which they had reserved for God was given away as charity in the name of their deities, but if the portion set apart for God was spent for other ends, then the portion set aside for the deities was not transferred to God.
اِنَّ الَّذِیۡنَ فَرَّقُوۡا دِیۡنَہُمۡ وَکَانُوۡا شِیَعًا لَّسۡتَ مِنۡہُمۡ فِیۡ شَیۡءٍ ۚ اِنَّمَاۤ اَمۡرُہُمۡ اِلَی اللّٰہِ ثُمَّ یُنَبِّئُہُمۡ بِمَا کَانُوۡا یَفۡعَلُوۡنَ
30:33.
The words, "split up their religion" signify that when people begin to follow their own caprices and fancies, differences arise among them and unanimity of views disappears.
30:33.
Important Words:
شیعا (sects) is the plural of شیعة which means, a separate or distinct party or sect of men; any people that have combined in or for an affair. The word is derived from شاع, which means, it became spread, published, divulged or made known; it became scattered or dispersed. شاع also means, he or it followed (him). شیع ابله means, he called out to his (straying or lingering) camels, whereupon they went along and followed one another. شیعة also means, he encouraged and strengthened him. تشایعت الابل means, the camels became separate parties; or they went together (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, split up their religion, signify that when all and sundry begin to follow their own judgement, there are sure to be differences among them and there remains no unity of opinion.
d
30:33.
467
“使他们的宗教分裂” 这些字, 意指当人们开始按照各自的奇怪和空幻的想法办事, 他们之间就会产生分歧, 意见就会不一致。
a
30:33.
899
Important Words:
شیعا (sects) is the plural of شیعة which means, a separate or distinct party or sect of men; any people that have combined in or for an affair. The word is derived from شاع, which means, it became spread, published, divulged or made known; it became scattered or dispersed. شاع also means, he or it followed (him). شیع ابله means, he called out to his (straying or lingering) camels, whereupon they went along and followed one another. شیعة also means, he encouraged and strengthened him. تشایعت الابل means, the camels became separate parties; or they went together (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, split up their religion, signify that when all and sundry begin to follow their own judgement, there are sure to be differences among them and there remains no unity of opinion.
d
30:33.
937
The words, "split up their religion" signify that when people begin to follow their own caprices and fancies, differences arise among them and unanimity of views disappears.
ہُنَالِکَ تَبۡلُوۡا کُلُّ نَفۡسٍ مَّاۤ اَسۡلَفَتۡ ۚ وَرُدُّوۡۤا اِلَی اللّٰہِ مَوۡلٰٮہُمُ الۡحَقِّ ۖ وَضَلَّ عَنۡہُمۡ مَّا کَانُوۡا یَفۡتَرُوۡنَ
86:10.
It is not given to man fully to comprehend and realize the reality of things in this world. It is only in the next world that the veil shall be completely lifted from all things and their real nature will come to light.
86:10.
Important Words:
تبلوا (shall realize) is derived from بلا. They say بلاہ i.e. he tried or proved or tested him with something good or evil; he knew it or became acquainted with it. بلوته also means, I smelt it (Lane).
Commentary:
The verse implies that it is not given to man to fully comprehend and realize the reality and details of everything in this world. It is only in the next world that the veil shall be completely lifted from all things and their real nature will come to light and judgement will be pronounced regarding all matters by God Who is the real Master of all creation.
d
86:10.
588
人类今生不能充分理会并认识到事情的真相。只有在后世才完全拉开一切事情的面纱而显露出它们真正的性质。
b
86:10.
1306
Important Words:
تبلوا (shall realize) is derived from بلا. They say بلاہ i.e. he tried or proved or tested him with something good or evil; he knew it or became acquainted with it. بلوته also means, I smelt it (Lane).
Commentary:
The verse implies that it is not given to man to fully comprehend and realize the reality and details of everything in this world. It is only in the next world that the veil shall be completely lifted from all things and their real nature will come to light and judgement will be pronounced regarding all matters by God Who is the real Master of all creation.
a
86:10.
1257
It is not given to man fully to comprehend and realize the reality of things in this world. It is only in the next world that the veil shall be completely lifted from all things and their real nature will come to light.
قُلۡ ہَلۡ مِنۡ شُرَکَآئِکُمۡ مَّنۡ یَّہۡدِیۡۤ اِلَی الۡحَقِّ ۚ قُلِ اللّٰہُ یَہۡدِیۡ لِلۡحَقِّ ۗ اَفَمَنۡ یَّہۡدِیۡۤ اِلَی الۡحَقِّ اَحَقُّ اَنۡ یُّتَّبَعَ اَمَّنۡ لَّا یَہِدِّیۡۤ اِلَّاۤ اَنۡ یُّہۡدٰی ۖ فَمَا لَکُمۡ کَیۡفَ تَحۡکُمُوۡنَ
Important Words:
یھدی yahiddi (finds the way himself) which is really یھتدی (from اھتدی i.e. he found or followed the right way) is the intransitive form of ھدی which means, he directed him aright or caused him to take or follow the right way. یھدی (which is really یھتدی, the letter تا having been merged into the letter د) means, he became rightly directed; he followed or found the right way; he went aright (Lane).
Commentary:
The untenability of their position is brought home to idolaters in this verse. The verse asks them the pertinent question:If God does not send guidance, is it their idols who do so? If the latter have ever sent guidance for men, their votaries could say, with some justification, that God might have entrusted the task of guidance to these idols or deities. But the fact is that not a single instance is on record where an idol or a false deity has ever been credited with the sending down of guidance for mankind. It is indeed strange that, whereas idolatry is so rife in the world, there is not a single book on earth which is alleged to have been revealed to any person by any of the false deities. The world has witnessed all sorts of lies invented by men, but nobody has ever dared to forge the lie that such and such a book has been revealed to him by such and such an idol or deity. Now when the sending down of guidance has never been even falsely ascribed to any idol or deity, how can the idolaters, in the face of guidance having been revealed to mankind in all ages, deny that it is God the Almighty Who sends it down for humanity?
The words, Is then he who leads to the truth more worthy to be followed, may also refer to the Prophets of God who are sent to guide men to the truth. In this case the latter part of the verse would mean, "who is more worthy to be followed, a Prophet of God or the false deities and their votaries who themselves stand in need of guidance and cannot (in opposition to the teaching of the Prophets) offer any revealed teaching?"
1311
Important Words:
یھدی yahiddi (finds the way himself) which is really یھتدی (from اھتدی i.e. he found or followed the right way) is the intransitive form of ھدی which means, he directed him aright or caused him to take or follow the right way. یھدی (which is really یھتدی, the letter تا having been merged into the letter د) means, he became rightly directed; he followed or found the right way; he went aright (Lane).
Commentary:
The untenability of their position is brought home to idolaters in this verse. The verse asks them the pertinent question:If God does not send guidance, is it their idols who do so? If the latter have ever sent guidance for men, their votaries could say, with some justification, that God might have entrusted the task of guidance to these idols or deities. But the fact is that not a single instance is on record where an idol or a false deity has ever been credited with the sending down of guidance for mankind. It is indeed strange that, whereas idolatry is so rife in the world, there is not a single book on earth which is alleged to have been revealed to any person by any of the false deities. The world has witnessed all sorts of lies invented by men, but nobody has ever dared to forge the lie that such and such a book has been revealed to him by such and such an idol or deity. Now when the sending down of guidance has never been even falsely ascribed to any idol or deity, how can the idolaters, in the face of guidance having been revealed to mankind in all ages, deny that it is God the Almighty Who sends it down for humanity?
The words, Is then he who leads to the truth more worthy to be followed, may also refer to the Prophets of God who are sent to guide men to the truth. In this case the latter part of the verse would mean, "who is more worthy to be followed, a Prophet of God or the false deities and their votaries who themselves stand in need of guidance and cannot (in opposition to the teaching of the Prophets) offer any revealed teaching?"
وَلَوۡ شِئۡنَا لَرَفَعۡنٰہُ بِہَا وَلٰکِنَّہٗۤ اَخۡلَدَ اِلَی الۡاَرۡضِ وَاتَّبَعَ ہَوٰٮہُ ۚ فَمَثَلُہٗ کَمَثَلِ الۡکَلۡبِ اِنۡ تَحۡمِلۡ عَلَیۡہِ یَلۡہَثۡ اَوۡ تَتۡرُکۡہُ یَلۡہَث ۚ ذّٰلِکَ مَثَلُ الۡقَوۡمِ الَّذِیۡنَ کَذَّبُوۡا بِاٰیٰتِنَا ۚ فَاقۡصُصِ الۡقَصَصَ لَعَلَّہُمۡ یَتَفَکَّرُوۡنَ
یعنی ہمیشہ خداتعالیٰ کے خلاف شکایت کرتے رہتے ہیں کہ اس نے ہمیں کچھ نہیں دیا۔
Material things, specially love of money.
Yalhath, (from Lahatha which means, his breath rose on account of fatigue or weariness), signifies that whether or not such a one is asked to make sacrifices in the cause of religion, he seems to be always panting like a thirsty dog, as if the ever-increasing burden of sacrifices is leaving him completely exhausted.
Important Words:
تحمل علیه (thou drive him away). تحمل is derived from حمل. They say حمله i.e. he bore or carried or conveyed it. حمل علیه الشیءmeans, he loaded him with the thing, or he put the thing on him as a load; or he imposed on him the thing as a burden. حمل علیه means, he charged or assaulted or attacked him (Lane). It is in the last mentioned sense that the word has been rendered here as "drive him away".
یلھث (hangs out his tongue) is formed from لھث meaning, he thirsted; or thirst heated his body. They say لھث الکلب i.e. the dog put forth his tongue on account of thirst or fatigue or weariness. لھث الرجل means, the breath of the man rose on account of fatigue or weariness; or he was fatigued or weary (Lane & Aqrab).
قصص (description) is the noun-infinitive from قص. They say قص اثره i.e. he followed his footsteps; or he followed his track in pursuit. قص الشعر means, he cut or clipped the hair. قص علیه الخبر means, he related to-him the news or the narrative or the story. قصص therefore, means, description or explanation; a narrative or story; following someone or something in his or its footsteps or track (Lane & Aqrab). See also 3:63.
Commentary:
The verse continues the description of the similitude begun in the previous verse. When a man becomes wholly engrossed in worldly affairs and begins to follow his evil desires and inclinations and rejects truth, he becomes, degraded, as it were, to the position of a dog. His thirst for money becomes insatiable. He continues to hanker after the paltry goods of this world. This description quite fits in with a hypocrite or one weak in faith. Whether or not he is made to undergo sacrifices in the cause of religion, he seems to be always panting like a thirsty dog, as if the ever-increasing burden of sacrifices is leaving him exhausted. The above interpretation is in accord with the meaning of the expression حمل علیه in the sense of "putting a load on". If, however, the expression is taken in the sense of "attacking or charging" or for that matter "driving", then the words would mean that the weak of faith belonging to the class of people mentioned here always feel fatigued and weary in the way of God, whether they are smitten with afflictions and trials or not.
1
یعنی ہمیشہ خداتعالیٰ کے خلاف شکایت کرتے رہتے ہیں کہ اس نے ہمیں کچھ نہیں دیا۔
1064
Important Words:
تحمل علیه (thou drive him away). تحمل is derived from حمل. They say حمله i.e. he bore or carried or conveyed it. حمل علیه الشیءmeans, he loaded him with the thing, or he put the thing on him as a load; or he imposed on him the thing as a burden. حمل علیه means, he charged or assaulted or attacked him (Lane). It is in the last mentioned sense that the word has been rendered here as "drive him away".
یلھث (hangs out his tongue) is formed from لھث meaning, he thirsted; or thirst heated his body. They say لھث الکلب i.e. the dog put forth his tongue on account of thirst or fatigue or weariness. لھث الرجل means, the breath of the man rose on account of fatigue or weariness; or he was fatigued or weary (Lane & Aqrab).
قصص (description) is the noun-infinitive from قص. They say قص اثره i.e. he followed his footsteps; or he followed his track in pursuit. قص الشعر means, he cut or clipped the hair. قص علیه الخبر means, he related to-him the news or the narrative or the story. قصص therefore, means, description or explanation; a narrative or story; following someone or something in his or its footsteps or track (Lane & Aqrab). See also 3:63.
Commentary:
The verse continues the description of the similitude begun in the previous verse. When a man becomes wholly engrossed in worldly affairs and begins to follow his evil desires and inclinations and rejects truth, he becomes, degraded, as it were, to the position of a dog. His thirst for money becomes insatiable. He continues to hanker after the paltry goods of this world. This description quite fits in with a hypocrite or one weak in faith. Whether or not he is made to undergo sacrifices in the cause of religion, he seems to be always panting like a thirsty dog, as if the ever-increasing burden of sacrifices is leaving him exhausted. The above interpretation is in accord with the meaning of the expression حمل علیه in the sense of "putting a load on". If, however, the expression is taken in the sense of "attacking or charging" or for that matter "driving", then the words would mean that the weak of faith belonging to the class of people mentioned here always feel fatigued and weary in the way of God, whether they are smitten with afflictions and trials or not.
1073
Material things, specially love of money.
1074
Yalhath, (from Lahatha which means, his breath rose on account of fatigue or weariness), signifies that whether or not such a one is asked to make sacrifices in the cause of religion, he seems to be always panting like a thirsty dog, as if the ever-increasing burden of sacrifices is leaving him completely exhausted.
وَاِنۡ تَدۡعُوۡہُمۡ اِلَی الۡہُدٰی لَا یَتَّبِعُوۡکُمۡ ۚ سَوَآءٌ عَلَیۡکُمۡ اَدَعَوۡتُمُوۡہُمۡ اَمۡ اَنۡتُمۡ صٰمِتُوۡنَ
7:199.
7:199.
e
7:199.
c
7:199.
1079
Commentary:
This verse refers to inanimate things such as idols and images which some people, out of their ignorance, take as gods.
c
7:199.
وَاِنۡ تَدۡعُوۡہُمۡ اِلَی الۡہُدٰی لَا یَسۡمَعُوۡا ۖ وَتَرٰٮہُمۡ یَنۡظُرُوۡنَ اِلَیۡکَ وَہُمۡ لَا یُبۡصِرُوۡنَ
7:194.
10:44.
A person steeped in error refuses to accept the truth, however clear and unmistakable may be the Signs shown to him to establish the untenability of his position. The disbelievers see the cause of Islam advancing by rapid strides before their very eyes, yet they pretend not to see it and refuse to acknowledge it.
7:194
10:44.
Commentary:
A person steeped in error refuses to accept the truth, however clear and unmistakable the signs shown to him to establish the untenability of his position. The verse means to say that disbelievers see the cause of Islam making progress by rapid strides before their own eyes, yet they pretend not to see it and refuse to acknowledge it.
e
7:194.
f
10:44.
c
7:194
d
10:44.
1083
Commentary:
A person steeped in error refuses to accept the truth, however clear and unmistakable the signs shown to him to establish the untenability of his position. The verse means to say that disbelievers see the cause of Islam making progress by rapid strides before their own eyes, yet they pretend not to see it and refuse to acknowledge it.
e
7:194.
f
10:44.
1087
A person steeped in error refuses to accept the truth, however clear and unmistakable may be the Signs shown to him to establish the untenability of his position. The disbelievers see the cause of Islam advancing by rapid strides before their very eyes, yet they pretend not to see it and refuse to acknowledge it.
یُجٰدِلُوۡنَکَ فِی الۡحَقِّ بَعۡدَمَا تَبَیَّنَ کَاَنَّمَا یُسَاقُوۡنَ اِلَی الۡمَوۡتِ وَہُمۡ یَنۡظُرُوۡنَ
یعنی کفار۔ کیونکہ مومن تو لڑائی کو ناپسند کرنے کے باوجود خدا کے حکم کو ماننے کے لئے تیار تھے جیسا کہ اوپر کی آیت سے اور دوسری آیتوں سے ثابت ہے۔ مفسرین نے اس کے یہ معنے کیے ہیں کہ صحابہؓ جہاد کے حکم پر رسول اللہ صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم سے شدید بحث کرتے تھے کہ یہ حکم کیوں ملا۔ مگر یہ قرآن کریم اور تاریخ سے غلط معلوم ہوتا ہے۔
The verse does not refer to Muslims as wrongly understood by some Commentators, but to disbelievers. There is absolutely no evidence in history to show that the Holy Prophet’s Companions ever disputed with him with regard to fighting the enemy. On the contrary, it is related that when before the Battle of Badr he consulted them, they all expressed their complete readiness and even eagerness to accompany him and fight the enemy wherever he might take them (Hisham). Even the disbelievers who came out to fight the Muslims admitted that the latter looked like so many "seekers after death" on the field of battle (Tabari). The verse only signifies that as the enemies of Islam abhorred the truth as one abhors death, so, as a result of this, they were going to be punished with death.
Commentary:
This verse refers not to the Companions of the Holy Prophet, as wrongly understood by some commentators, but to his enemies. There is absolutely no evidence in history to show that the Holy Prophet’s Companions disputed with him with regard to fighting the enemy. On the contrary, it is expressly related that when before the Battle of Badr he consulted them, they all expressed their readiness and even eagerness to accompany him and fight the enemy wherever he might take them (Hisham, ii. 13). Even the disbelievers who came out to fight the Muslims admitted that the latter looked like so many "seekers after death" on the field of battle (Tabari). What the verse, therefore, means is simply this that as the enemies of Islam abhorred the truth as one abhors death, so, as a result of this, they were going to be punished with death itself.
2
یعنی کفار۔ کیونکہ مومن تو لڑائی کو ناپسند کرنے کے باوجود خدا کے حکم کو ماننے کے لئے تیار تھے جیسا کہ اوپر کی آیت سے اور دوسری آیتوں سے ثابت ہے۔ مفسرین نے اس کے یہ معنے کیے ہیں کہ صحابہؓ جہاد کے حکم پر رسول اللہ صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم سے شدید بحث کرتے تھے کہ یہ حکم کیوں ملا۔ مگر یہ قرآن کریم اور تاریخ سے غلط معلوم ہوتا ہے۔
1097
Commentary:
This verse refers not to the Companions of the Holy Prophet, as wrongly understood by some commentators, but to his enemies. There is absolutely no evidence in history to show that the Holy Prophet’s Companions disputed with him with regard to fighting the enemy. On the contrary, it is expressly related that when before the Battle of Badr he consulted them, they all expressed their readiness and even eagerness to accompany him and fight the enemy wherever he might take them (Hisham, ii. 13). Even the disbelievers who came out to fight the Muslims admitted that the latter looked like so many "seekers after death" on the field of battle (Tabari). What the verse, therefore, means is simply this that as the enemies of Islam abhorred the truth as one abhors death, so, as a result of this, they were going to be punished with death itself.
1096
The verse does not refer to Muslims as wrongly understood by some Commentators, but to disbelievers. There is absolutely no evidence in history to show that the Holy Prophet’s Companions ever disputed with him with regard to fighting the enemy. On the contrary, it is related that when before the Battle of Badr he consulted them, they all expressed their complete readiness and even eagerness to accompany him and fight the enemy wherever he might take them (Hisham). Even the disbelievers who came out to fight the Muslims admitted that the latter looked like so many "seekers after death" on the field of battle (Tabari). The verse only signifies that as the enemies of Islam abhorred the truth as one abhors death, so, as a result of this, they were going to be punished with death.
اِذۡ یُوۡحِیۡ رَبُّکَ اِلَی الۡمَلٰٓئِکَۃِ اَنِّیۡ مَعَکُمۡ فَثَبِّتُوا الَّذِیۡنَ اٰمَنُوۡا ۚ سَاُلۡقِیۡ فِیۡ قُلُوۡبِ الَّذِیۡنَ کَفَرُوا الرُّعۡبَ فَاضۡرِبُوۡا فَوۡقَ الۡاَعۡنَاقِ وَاضۡرِبُوۡا مِنۡہُمۡ کُلَّ بَنَانٍ
就在头下方的颈部上半部, 被认为最容易受刀剑的攻击而受伤。
The upper part of the neck which is just below the head and is considered to be most vulnerable for dealing an effective blow with the sword.
Important Words:
فوق (upper part) is derived from فاق. They say فاقھم i.e. he was or became above them. So فوق means, the location or place that is above or over a person or a thing. They say فوقه رأسه i.e. his upper part is his head (Lane).
Commentary:
This verse shows that the angels are, as it were, intermediaries between God and men. It is through them that God’sassistance comes to men.
The verse also hints that there are some angels whose function is to strengthen the hearts of good men and make them firm, while there are others who are deputed to cast terror into the hearts of wicked men. So God bade the former class of angels to strengthen the hearts of the believers and told them that He would cast terror into the hearts of the disbelievers through the other class of angels.
God instructed the believers to strike the disbelievers at "the upper parts of their necks" because the upper part of the neck, i.e. that which is just below the head, is considered to be the best point for dealing an effective blow with the sword. This order related to such of the enemy as deserved to be killed and without killing whom the Muslims could not defend themselves. The striking on the “finger-tips” was meant to incapacitate the enemy and make them unfit for fighting. This order thus related to those of the enemy who, so far as possible, were to be spared with the infliction of minimum injury. Both these orders were faithfully carried out, for although the Muslims were very weak at Badr, they were able to kill seventy of the disbelievers, mostly leaders, and take as many prisoners, while the enemy could kill only fourteen of them.
539
就在头下方的颈部上半部, 被认为最容易受刀剑的攻击而受伤。
1103
Important Words:
فوق (upper part) is derived from فاق. They say فاقھم i.e. he was or became above them. So فوق means, the location or place that is above or over a person or a thing. They say فوقه رأسه i.e. his upper part is his head (Lane).
Commentary:
This verse shows that the angels are, as it were, intermediaries between God and men. It is through them that God’sassistance comes to men.
The verse also hints that there are some angels whose function is to strengthen the hearts of good men and make them firm, while there are others who are deputed to cast terror into the hearts of wicked men. So God bade the former class of angels to strengthen the hearts of the believers and told them that He would cast terror into the hearts of the disbelievers through the other class of angels.
God instructed the believers to strike the disbelievers at "the upper parts of their necks" because the upper part of the neck, i.e. that which is just below the head, is considered to be the best point for dealing an effective blow with the sword. This order related to such of the enemy as deserved to be killed and without killing whom the Muslims could not defend themselves. The striking on the “finger-tips” was meant to incapacitate the enemy and make them unfit for fighting. This order thus related to those of the enemy who, so far as possible, were to be spared with the infliction of minimum injury. Both these orders were faithfully carried out, for although the Muslims were very weak at Badr, they were able to kill seventy of the disbelievers, mostly leaders, and take as many prisoners, while the enemy could kill only fourteen of them.
1104
The upper part of the neck which is just below the head and is considered to be most vulnerable for dealing an effective blow with the sword.
بَرَآءَۃٌ مِّنَ اللّٰہِ وَرَسُوۡلِہٖۤ اِلَی الَّذِیۡنَ عٰہَدتُّمۡ مِّنَ الۡمُشۡرِکِیۡنَ
اس جگہ جو بَرَآءَۃٌ کا لفظ استعمال کیا گیا ہے اس کے عربی میں دو معنے ہیں۔بَرَآءَۃٌ کے ایک معنے بیزاری کے ہوتے ہیں اور ایک معنے الزام کو دور کرنے کے ہوتے ہیں۔ جن لوگوں کو اس آیت کے معنے سمجھنے میں غلطی لگی ہے وہ بَرَآءَۃٌ کے معنے صرف بیزاری کے کرتے ہیں حالانکہ لغت میں اس کے ایک دوسرے اور اہم معنے یہ بھی ہیں کہ الزام سے آزاد ہو جانا اور یہی معنے اس جگہ چسپاں ہوتے ہیں۔
جیسا کہ آیت کے مضمون سے واضح ہے مکہ والوں کو بتایا گیا ہے کہ تم لوگ یہ اعتراض کیا کرتے تھے کہ محمد رسول اللہ کا دعویٰ تو یہ ہے کہ میں مکی نبی ہوں جس کی پیشگوئی حضرت ابراہیم علیہ السلام نے
Bara’ah signifies a declaration of vindication; exemption, absolution from a fault or responsibility; exemption or absolution from a demand, etc. (Taj).
‘Ahada is here used not in the sense of entering into a treaty or a compact but making a commitment or a solemn promise by which one binds oneself (Lisan). The verse makes a solemn declaration that Islam and the Holy Prophet have been completely vindicated by the Fall of Mecca. While the Prophet was being driven from Mecca as a friendless fugitive with a price on his head, it was then declared in unmistakable terms that he would come back to it in triumph and glory (28:86). That prophecy was fulfilled with the Fall of Mecca and the establishment of the rule of Islam throughout Arabia. Thus the Holy Prophet stood fully vindicated and absolved from the demand of the Meccans that in fulfilment of his repeated declaration Mecca should have fallen into his hands. See also Introduction to Surah Anfal.
Important Words:
براءة (a declaration of absolution) is the noun-infinitive from بری which means, he was or became clear or free from a thing; or he was or became immune, secure or safe. بری من المرض means, he became free from the disease or malady. بری الجرحmeans, the wound healed or was healing. بری من الامر means, he was free from the thing or quit thereof; or he was guiltless of it and was not responsible for it. They say بری من الدین i.e. he became clear or quit of debt; or he became exempt from the demand. بری الیك من حقك means, he was or became clear or quit to thee of thy claim or due or right; or he was or became exempt from thy demand. براءة being the noun-infinitive from بری gives all the meanings derived from the verbal uses of the word given above, It particularly means, a declaration of granting or conferring or announcing immunity or exemption or absolution from a fault or responsibility; freedom from blame; exemption or absolution from a demand, etc. (Taj & Aqrab). See also 3:50.
عاھدتم (you made promises). عاھد is derived from عھد for which see 2:41. The word عاھد is here used not in the sense of entering into a treaty or a compact but making a promise, or making a solemn promise by which one binds oneself. They say عاھدت الله ان لا افعل کذا i.e. I have made a promise to God that I will not do such a thing (Lisan).
Commentary:
This Surah does not begin with the usual formula of بسم الله (In the name of God), for the reason of which see Introductory Note to chapter Anfal.
The first verse of this Surah refers to all the idolaters of Arabia including the dhimmis, i.e. those disbelievers who lived under the protection of Muslims as well as those non-Muslim Arab tribes with whom Muslims had treaty relations.
The verse declares the complete freedom of God and the Holy Prophet from all demand or blame, meaning thereby that all promises made by God and His Messenger had been fulfilled and their truthfulness fully established and, therefore, the idolaters, to whatever class they belonged, could bring no charge against God and His Prophet. Prophecies about the defeat and discomfiture of infidels and the ultimate success and triumph of Islam had been repeatedly made, and, now that all these prophecies had been fulfilled, the infidels of Arabia could no longer say that the declarations of the Prophet about the final triumph of Islam were mere empty promises. By the fulfilment of these promises, the verse says, God and His Messenger had proved their absolute freedom from the charge of making false promises.
1
اس جگہ جو بَرَآءَۃٌ کا لفظ استعمال کیا گیا ہے اس کے عربی میں دو معنے ہیں۔بَرَآءَۃٌ کے ایک معنے بیزاری کے ہوتے ہیں اور ایک معنے الزام کو دور کرنے کے ہوتے ہیں۔ جن لوگوں کو اس آیت کے معنے سمجھنے میں غلطی لگی ہے وہ بَرَآءَۃٌ کے معنے صرف بیزاری کے کرتے ہیں حالانکہ لغت میں اس کے ایک دوسرے اور اہم معنے یہ بھی ہیں کہ الزام سے آزاد ہو جانا اور یہی معنے اس جگہ چسپاں ہوتے ہیں۔
جیسا کہ آیت کے مضمون سے واضح ہے مکہ والوں کو بتایا گیا ہے کہ تم لوگ یہ اعتراض کیا کرتے تھے کہ محمد رسول اللہ کا دعویٰ تو یہ ہے کہ میں مکی نبی ہوں جس کی پیشگوئی حضرت ابراہیم علیہ السلام نے
1164
Important Words:
براءة (a declaration of absolution) is the noun-infinitive from بری which means, he was or became clear or free from a thing; or he was or became immune, secure or safe. بری من المرض means, he became free from the disease or malady. بری الجرحmeans, the wound healed or was healing. بری من الامر means, he was free from the thing or quit thereof; or he was guiltless of it and was not responsible for it. They say بری من الدین i.e. he became clear or quit of debt; or he became exempt from the demand. بری الیك من حقك means, he was or became clear or quit to thee of thy claim or due or right; or he was or became exempt from thy demand. براءة being the noun-infinitive from بری gives all the meanings derived from the verbal uses of the word given above, It particularly means, a declaration of granting or conferring or announcing immunity or exemption or absolution from a fault or responsibility; freedom from blame; exemption or absolution from a demand, etc. (Taj & Aqrab). See also 3:50.
عاھدتم (you made promises). عاھد is derived from عھد for which see 2:41. The word عاھد is here used not in the sense of entering into a treaty or a compact but making a promise, or making a solemn promise by which one binds oneself. They say عاھدت الله ان لا افعل کذا i.e. I have made a promise to God that I will not do such a thing (Lisan).
Commentary:
This Surah does not begin with the usual formula of بسم الله (In the name of God), for the reason of which see Introductory Note to chapter Anfal.
The first verse of this Surah refers to all the idolaters of Arabia including the dhimmis, i.e. those disbelievers who lived under the protection of Muslims as well as those non-Muslim Arab tribes with whom Muslims had treaty relations.
The verse declares the complete freedom of God and the Holy Prophet from all demand or blame, meaning thereby that all promises made by God and His Messenger had been fulfilled and their truthfulness fully established and, therefore, the idolaters, to whatever class they belonged, could bring no charge against God and His Prophet. Prophecies about the defeat and discomfiture of infidels and the ultimate success and triumph of Islam had been repeatedly made, and, now that all these prophecies had been fulfilled, the infidels of Arabia could no longer say that the declarations of the Prophet about the final triumph of Islam were mere empty promises. By the fulfilment of these promises, the verse says, God and His Messenger had proved their absolute freedom from the charge of making false promises.
1150
Bara’ah signifies a declaration of vindication; exemption, absolution from a fault or responsibility; exemption or absolution from a demand, etc. (Taj).
1151
‘Ahada is here used not in the sense of entering into a treaty or a compact but making a commitment or a solemn promise by which one binds oneself (Lisan). The verse makes a solemn declaration that Islam and the Holy Prophet have been completely vindicated by the Fall of Mecca. While the Prophet was being driven from Mecca as a friendless fugitive with a price on his head, it was then declared in unmistakable terms that he would come back to it in triumph and glory (28:86). That prophecy was fulfilled with the Fall of Mecca and the establishment of the rule of Islam throughout Arabia. Thus the Holy Prophet stood fully vindicated and absolved from the demand of the Meccans that in fulfilment of his repeated declaration Mecca should have fallen into his hands. See also Introduction to Surah Anfal.
وَاَذٰنٌ مِّنَ اللّٰہِ وَرَسُوۡلِہٖۤ اِلَی النَّاسِ یَوۡمَ الۡحَجِّ الۡاَکۡبَرِ اَنَّ اللّٰہَ بَرِیۡٓءٌ مِّنَ الۡمُشۡرِکِیۡنَ ۙ وَرَسُوۡلُہٗ ۚ فَاِنۡ تُبۡتُمۡ فَہُوَ خَیۡرٌ لَّکُمۡ ۖ وَاِنۡ تَوَلَّیۡتُمۡ فَاعۡلَمُوۡۤا اَنَّکُمۡ غَیۡرُ مُعۡجِزِی اللّٰہِ ۗ وَبَشِّرِ الَّذِیۡنَ کَفَرُوۡا بِعَذَابٍ اَلِیۡمٍ
حَجِّ اَکبر عام طور پر اُس حج کو کہتے ہیں جو جمعہ کو ہو۔ مگر اس جگہ مراد اُس حج سے ہے جو فتح مکہ کے دوسرے سال ہوا اور اسے حَجِّ اَکبرِ اس لئے کہا گیا ہے کہ پہلے سالوں میں حج کفار کی حکومت میں ہوتے تھے‘ مگر یہ پہلا حج تھا جو اسلامی حکومت میں ہوا۔
See 9:2.
4:139.
Adhan means, notification, proclamation or call (Lane).
Greater Pilgrimage was so called because it was the first pilgrimage performed under the control of the Muslims.
Whereas in the preceding verse Bara’ah signifies a declaration of vindication that the promises about the complete triumph of Islam had been fulfilled, in the present verse the word signifies "being clear of a person or a thing," i.e. having nothing to do with him or it (Lane). The declaration, contained in this verse and the one that follows is different from that embodied in vv. 9:1, 2; for whereas vv. 9:1, 2 relate to vindication that the promises made to the idolaters by the Holy Prophet had been fulfilled, the present verse pertains to the severance of all connections with them. This severance of relations should not be taken to mean that the verse declares that Muslims were free from all treaty obligations; for, as the following verse makes it quite clear, treaties are to be respected in all cases and must not be violated.
On his return from Tabuk in the ninth year of the Hijrah, the Holy Prophet sent ‘Ali to Mecca, who, on the occasion of the Greater Pilgrimage, made, as his represe
9:2.
4:139.
Important Words:
اذان (proclamation) is derived from اذن which means, he gave ear or listened; he permitted or allowed; he knew or he became informed, etc. آذن means, he informed, or notified or announced. اذان means, notification, announcement or call.
بری (clear) see 9:1 above. But whereas in that verse the word signifies absolution from obligations and from fulfilment of promises made by Islam, in the present verse it simply signifies being clear of a person or a thing, i.e. having nothing to do with him or it (Lane).
Commentary:
The declaration, contained in this verse and the one that follows, is different from that embodied in 9:1 & 2 above, for whereas vv. 9:1 & 2 relate to absolution from the fulfilment of promises made to idolaters, the present verse pertains to the severance of connections with them. This severance, however, should not be taken to mean that the verse declares Islam to be free from all treaty obligations; for, as the following verse makes it clear, treaties are to be respected in all cases and must not be violated.
It is related that on his return from Tabuk in the ninth year of the Hijrah, the Holy Prophet sent Abu Bakr to Mecca to announce, on the occasion of the Greater Pilgrimage, that henceforward no one would be allowed to perform the circuit of the Ka‘bah naked or unclothed. Immediately afterwards the first portion of this Surah was revealed. Upon this the Holy Prophet sent ‘Ali to Mecca, and he, as his cousin and representative, after reciting the opening verses of this Surah, made a proclamation containing the following two announcements before the pilgrims who had gathered at Mecca from all parts of Arabia:
1. No idolater shall approach the House of God after this year.
2. Treaties and engagements, made by the Holy Prophet with idolatrous tribes, shall stand and be faithfully respected till the end of their term. The idolaters of Arabia and the hypocrites of Medina had, by their plots and conspiracies against Muslims and by their persistent treacherous conduct, lost all claim to the clemency of the Holy Prophet. When he was absent on the expedition to Tabuk, they spread the false rumour that the whole Muslim army had been captured and the Prophet was dead. Moreover, Abu ‘Amir, a mischievous Arab leader, had gone to Syria to bring a Christian army to attack Muslims and in Arabia itself secret preparations had begun for a general rising. But for the timely return of the Holy Prophet, these plots would have resulted in great disturbance and heavy loss of life. When, on his return, the Holy Prophet learnt of the great mischief, set on foot in his absence and the plots hatched to deal a death-blow to Islam, he, with a view to preventing a recrudescence of such mischief ordered that henceforth no idolater could stay in the Hijaz with the exception of those with whom he had entered into a treaty, and these, too, were allowed to stay only till the expiry of the term of their treaty. The order was justified not only by the persistently treacherous conduct of the idolaters, but also by other political and cultural considerations which demanded its promulgation. The Hijaz had now become the religious as well as the political centre of Islam, and its interests demanded that it should be purged of all foreign and harmful elements likely to endanger its integrity and prove dangerous to the nascent Muslim community which had been brought into being to carry the message of the new Faith to the four corners of the earth.
b
9:2.
c
4:139.
554A
这是在穆斯林管理下第一次朝觐。
1
حَجِّ اَکبر عام طور پر اُس حج کو کہتے ہیں جو جمعہ کو ہو۔ مگر اس جگہ مراد اُس حج سے ہے جو فتح مکہ کے دوسرے سال ہوا اور اسے حَجِّ اَکبرِ اس لئے کہا گیا ہے کہ پہلے سالوں میں حج کفار کی حکومت میں ہوتے تھے‘ مگر یہ پہلا حج تھا جو اسلامی حکومت میں ہوا۔
b
9:2.
c
4:139.
1166
Important Words:
اذان (proclamation) is derived from اذن which means, he gave ear or listened; he permitted or allowed; he knew or he became informed, etc. آذن means, he informed, or notified or announced. اذان means, notification, announcement or call.
بری (clear) see 9:1 above. But whereas in that verse the word signifies absolution from obligations and from fulfilment of promises made by Islam, in the present verse it simply signifies being clear of a person or a thing, i.e. having nothing to do with him or it (Lane).
Commentary:
The declaration, contained in this verse and the one that follows, is different from that embodied in 9:1 & 2 above, for whereas vv. 9:1 & 2 relate to absolution from the fulfilment of promises made to idolaters, the present verse pertains to the severance of connections with them. This severance, however, should not be taken to mean that the verse declares Islam to be free from all treaty obligations; for, as the following verse makes it clear, treaties are to be respected in all cases and must not be violated.
It is related that on his return from Tabuk in the ninth year of the Hijrah, the Holy Prophet sent Abu Bakr to Mecca to announce, on the occasion of the Greater Pilgrimage, that henceforward no one would be allowed to perform the circuit of the Ka‘bah naked or unclothed. Immediately afterwards the first portion of this Surah was revealed. Upon this the Holy Prophet sent ‘Ali to Mecca, and he, as his cousin and representative, after reciting the opening verses of this Surah, made a proclamation containing the following two announcements before the pilgrims who had gathered at Mecca from all parts of Arabia:
1. No idolater shall approach the House of God after this year.
2. Treaties and engagements, made by the Holy Prophet with idolatrous tribes, shall stand and be faithfully respected till the end of their term. The idolaters of Arabia and the hypocrites of Medina had, by their plots and conspiracies against Muslims and by their persistent treacherous conduct, lost all claim to the clemency of the Holy Prophet. When he was absent on the expedition to Tabuk, they spread the false rumour that the whole Muslim army had been captured and the Prophet was dead. Moreover, Abu ‘Amir, a mischievous Arab leader, had gone to Syria to bring a Christian army to attack Muslims and in Arabia itself secret preparations had begun for a general rising. But for the timely return of the Holy Prophet, these plots would have resulted in great disturbance and heavy loss of life. When, on his return, the Holy Prophet learnt of the great mischief, set on foot in his absence and the plots hatched to deal a death-blow to Islam, he, with a view to preventing a recrudescence of such mischief ordered that henceforth no idolater could stay in the Hijaz with the exception of those with whom he had entered into a treaty, and these, too, were allowed to stay only till the expiry of the term of their treaty. The order was justified not only by the persistently treacherous conduct of the idolaters, but also by other political and cultural considerations which demanded its promulgation. The Hijaz had now become the religious as well as the political centre of Islam, and its interests demanded that it should be purged of all foreign and harmful elements likely to endanger its integrity and prove dangerous to the nascent Muslim community which had been brought into being to carry the message of the new Faith to the four corners of the earth.
a
See 9:2.
b
4:139.
1153
Adhan means, notification, proclamation or call (Lane).
1153A
Greater Pilgrimage was so called because it was the first pilgrimage performed under the control of the Muslims.
1154
Whereas in the preceding verse Bara’ah signifies a declaration of vindication that the promises about the complete triumph of Islam had been fulfilled, in the present verse the word signifies "being clear of a person or a thing," i.e. having nothing to do with him or it (Lane). The declaration, contained in this verse and the one that follows is different from that embodied in vv. 9:1, 2; for whereas vv. 9:1, 2 relate to vindication that the promises made to the idolaters by the Holy Prophet had been fulfilled, the present verse pertains to the severance of all connections with them. This severance of relations should not be taken to mean that the verse declares that Muslims were free from all treaty obligations; for, as the following verse makes it quite clear, treaties are to be respected in all cases and must not be violated.
On his return from Tabuk in the ninth year of the Hijrah, the Holy Prophet sent ‘Ali to Mecca, who, on the occasion of the Greater Pilgrimage, made, as his represe